Philips DVDR-730 Service Manual

Page 1

DVD-Video Recorder DVDR730/0x

Contents Page Contents Page

1 Technical Specifications and Connection

Facilities 2 Diversity Matrix 2

PCB Locations 2 2 Safety Information, General Notes 5 3 Directions for Use 7 4 Mechanical Instructions 38 5 Diagnostic Software 41 6 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram 43

Wiring Diagram 75

Waveforms 76

Testpoints 78 7 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts 51

Display Panel(Diagram 1) 81

Front Connector (FC)(Diagram 2) 82

Standby Panel (STBY)(Diagram 3) 86

Analog Board:Fronted Video (FV)(Diagram 1) 87

Analog Board: In / Out Video (IOV)(Diagram 2) 88

Analog Board: In / Out Audio (IOA)(Diagram 3) 89

Analog Board: Power Supply (PS)(Diagram 4) 90

Analog Board: Multi Sound Processing (MSP)

Analog Board: VPS (Diagram 6) 92

Analog Board: Follow Me (FOME) (Diagram 7) 92

Analog Board: Digital In/Out (DIGIO)(Diagram 8) 93

Analog Board: Audio Converter (DAC_ADC)

Copyright 2004 Philips Consumer Electronics B.V. Eindhoven, The Netherlands. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise without the prior permission of Philips.

(Diagram 5) 91

(Diagram 9) 94

UP Sub Board: Central Controler (CECO)

(Diagram 10) 99 UP Sub Board: Fan Control(FACO)(Diagram 11) 100 In/Out Extension Board (IOE) (Diagram 12) 103 DB Chrysalis 2.1: IDE, UARTS, RESET, BE

(Diagram 1) 105 DB Chrysalis 2.1: 1394 (Diagram 2) 106 DB Chrysalis 2.1: Audio PLL (Diagram 3) 107 DB Chrysalis 2.1: Chrysalis (Diagram 4) 108 DB Chrysalis 2.1: 1.8V Power (Diagram 5) 109 DB Chrysalis 2.1: Prog. scan DAC(Diagram 6) 110 DB Chrysalis 2.1: Flash SDRAM EEPROM

(Diagram 7) 111 DB Chrysalis 2.1: Video IO (Diagram 8) 112 DB Chrysalis 2.1: VIPs (Diagram 9) 113

8 Alignments 117 9 Circuit-, IC Descriptions and List

of Abbreviations 120

10 Spare Parts List 150

For repair information on the Basic Engine, refer to Service Manual DVD+RW VAD8041, 12NC: 3122 785 14850.

Published by GH 0493 Service PaCE Printed in the Netherlands Subject to modification EN 3122 785 14230

Page 2

EN 2 DVDR730/0x1.

Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

1. Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

1.1 PCB Locations

Display Board

EPG Board

optional

Digital Board

PCMCIA

Card Reader

Basic Engine

In/Out Extension Board

Up Sub Board

Remarks: The EPG Board is not present in the DVDR730.

1.2 Diversity Matrix

Type DVDR730/00/02

Digital Board Chrysalis

PAL Progressive Basic Engine AV3.5 VAD8041/01 I/O Extension Board PBAS IOE IST E2

UP Sub Board PBAS UP SUB IST PLUS E1 NG

Analog-Board PBAS AB IST PLUS E1 NG

Display Board PCB ASSY PB DC1 IST

PBAS CHRY PPS_E5_AV3

1.3 General:

Mains voltage : 198V-276V Mains frequency : 43 Hz - 63Hz Power consumption mains : 28 W Power consumption standby : < 7 W Power consumption low power stand-by : < 3 W

Analog Board

_PLUS

Test streams:PAL BG Philips Standard test pattern

1.4.1 System:

PAL B/G, PAL D/K, SECAM L/L’, PAL I

1.4.2 RF - Loop Through:

Frequency range : 45 MHz - 860 MHz Gain: (ANT IN - ANT OUT) : -6 dB to 0dB

1.4.3 Radio Interference:

input voltage /3 tone method (+40 dB min) : no limit

1.4.4 Receiver:

PLL tuning with AFC for optimum reception Frequency range: : 45.25 MHz - 857 MHz Sensitivity at 40 dB S/N : ≥ 60dBµV at 75Ω

(video unweighted )

1.4.5 Video Performance:

1.4 RF Tuner

Test equipment:Fluke 54200 TV Signal generator

Channel 25 / 503,25 MHz, Test pattern: PAL BG PHILIPS standard test pattern, RF Level 74 dBV

Page 3

Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

EN 3DVDR730/0x 1.

Measured on SCART 1 Frequency response: : 0 - 4.00 MHz +0-4dB Group delay ( 0.1 MHz - 4.4 MHz ) : 0 nsec ± 150nsec

1.4.6 Audio Performance:

Audio Performance Analogue - HiFi:

Frequency response at SCART 1 (L+R) output: : 100 Hz - 12 kHz / 0±

3dB S/N according to DIN 45405, 7, 1967 : and PHILIPS standard test pattern video signal: : FM: ≥ 50dB; AM ≥

45dB, unweighted Harmonic distortion ( 1 kHz, ± 25 kHz deviation ): : FM ≤ 1.5%; AM ≤ 2%

Audio Performance NICAM:

Frequency response at SCART 1(L+R) output: : 40 Hz - 15 kHz 0 ±

3dB S/N according to DIN 45405, 7, 1967 : and PHILIPS standard test pattern video signal: : ≥ 60 dB unweighted Harmonic distortion (1 kHz): : ≤ 0.5 %

1.4.7 Tuning

Automatic Search Tuning

scanning time without antenna : typ. 3 min. PAL stop level (vision carrier) : ≥ 37dBµV Maximum tuning error of a recalled program : ± 62.5 kHz Maximum tuning error during operation : ± 100 kHz

Tuning Principle

automatic B,G, I, DK and L/L’detection manual selection in "STORE" mode

1.5 Analogue Inputs

17- Y/CVBS GND

OUT 

18- Y/CVBS GND

IN  19- CVBS/Y 1Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*)  20- CVBS/Y  21- Shield 

1.5.2 SCART 2 (Connected to AUX)

Pin Signals: 1 - Audio R 1.8V RMS  2 - Audio R  3 - Audio L 1.8V RMS  4 - Audio GND  5 - Blue/Chroma

GND  6 - Audio L  7 - Blue in/Chroma

out ± 3dB 0.3Vpp Chroma (burst)  8 - Function

switch  9 - Green GND  10- P50 control  11- Green  12- Nc 13- Red/Chroma

GND  14- fast switch

GND  15- Red in/Chroma

in  16- fast switch

RGB/ CVBS or

Y  17- CVBS GND

OUT  18- CVBS GND IN  19- CVBS/Y/RGB

sync 1Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*)  20- CVBS/Y  21- Shield 

1.5.1 SCART 1 (Connected to TV)

Pin Signals: 1 - Audio R 1.8V RMS  2 - Audio R  3 - Audio L 1.8V RMS  4 - Audio GND  5 - Blue/Chroma

GND  6 - Audio L  7 - Blue out/

Chroma in 0.7Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*)  8 - Function

switch <2V = TV

>4.5V / <7V = asp. ratio 16:9 DVD

>9.5V / <12V = asp. ratio 4:3 DVD  9 -Green GND  10- P50 control  11- Green 0.7Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*) 12- Nc 13- Red/Chroma

GND 

14- fast switch

GND 

15- Red out/

Chroma out 0.7Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*)

± 3dB 0.3Vpp Chroma (burst)  16- fast switch

RGB/ CVBS or Y <0.4V into 75 Ohm = CVBS

>1V / <3V into 75 Ohm = RGB 

(*) for 100% white

1.5.3 Audio/Video Front Input Connectors

Audio

Input voltage : 2 Vrms Input impedance : >10kΩ

Video - Cinch

Input voltage : 1 Vpp ± 3dB Input impedance : 75 Ω

Video - YC (Hosiden)

Input voltage Y : 1Vpp ± 3dB Input impedance Y : 75 Ω Input voltage C : burst 300 mVpp ± 3

Input impedance C : 75 Ω

1.6 Video Performance

All outputs loaded with 75 Ohm SNR measurements over full bandwidth without weighting.

1.6.1 SCART (RGB)

SNR : > -65 dB on all output Bandwidth : 4.8 MHz ± 2dB

Page 4

EN 4 DVDR730/0x1.

Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

1.7 Audio Performance CD

1.7.1 Cinch Output Rear

Output voltage 2 channel mode : 2Vrms ± 2dB Channel unbalance (1kHz) : <1dB Crosstalk 1kHz : >95dB Crosstalk 20Hz-20kHz : >85dB Frequency response 20Hz- 20kHz : ±0.2dB max Signal to noise ratio : >95 dB Dynamic range 1kHz : >85dB Dynamic range 20Hz-20kHz : >80dB Distortion and noise 1kHz : >85dB Distortion and noise 20Hz-20kHz : >75dB Intermodulation distortion : >77dB Mute : >95dB Outband attenuation: : >40dB above 30kHz

1.7.2 Scart Audio

Output voltage 2 channel mode : 1.6Vrms ± 2dB Channel unbalance (1kHz) : <1dB Crosstalk 1kHz : >85dB Crosstalk 20Hz-20kHz : >70dB Frequency response 20Hz- 20kHz : ± 0.2dB max Signal to noise ratio : >85 dB Dynamic range 1kHz : >75dB Dynamic range 20Hz-20kHz : >70dB Distortion and noise 1kHz : >75dB Distortion and noise 20Hz-20kHz : >65dB Intermodulation distortion : >70dB Mute (spin-up, pause, access) : >85dB Outband attenuation: : >40dB above 25kHz

1.12 Dimensions and Weight

Height of feet : 10mm Apparatus tray closed : WxDxH :435 x 324.5 x

88cm

Apparatus tray open : WxDxH :435 x 366 x

88cm Weight without packaging : app. 4 kg ± 0.5 kg Weight in packaging : app. 6.5 kg

1.13 Laser Output Power & Wavelength

1.13.1 DVD

Output power during reading : 0.8mW Output power during writing : 20mW Wavelength : 660nm

1.13.2 CD

Output power : 0.3mW Wavelength : 780nm

1.8 Digital Output

1.8.1 Coaxial

CDDA/ LPCM (incl MPEG1) : according IEC958 MPEG2, AC3 audio : according IEC1937 DTS : according IEC1937,

amendment 1

1.9 Card Reader

IDE Interface ATA Card Reader PC Card Standard Rev 8.0 Type I & II PCMCIA ATA Flash Memory Card Standard Data transfer: 16.6MB/s max. Support of all types of IDE Hard Disk Drives, Compact Flash Cards, Smart Media Cards / Smart Media ROM Cards, MMC Cards, SD Cards,

1.10 Digital Video Input (IEEE 1394)

1.10.1 Applicable Standards

Implementation according: IEEE Std 1394-1995 IEC 61883 - Part 1 IEC 61883 - Part 2 SD-DVCR (02-01-1997) Specification of consumer use digital VCR’s using 6.3 mm magnetic tape - dec.1994 Mechanical connection according: Annex A of 61883-1

1.11 P50 System Control

Via SCART pin nr 10

Page 5

Safety Information, General Notes

2. Safety Information, General Notes

EN 5DVDR730/0x 2.

2.1 Description of the Production Number on the type plate

The type plate of the set contains a production number that consists of the following:

Example code

2.1.1 The Site Code (Production center)

The site code consists of 2 letters and relates to the factory assembling and/or equipping the products. The site code letters valid for Consumer Electronics are stated in UAT-0477. The code is used to trace the production site of the model number, e.g. VN...Szekesfehervar KB...Hasselt KT...SBI Electronics Shenzhen

2.1.2 BOM Code

The BOM code is used to link the model to the actual Bill Of Material used for assembly during set production. One set model can be made up of different standard designs / modules. This depends on the material availability in the production or the development progress of the successor modules. Different modules may be used during the same production period or changed back and forth from one week to the other. BOM version 1 gets BOM code 1, BOM version 2 gets BOM code 2, etc. Allowed codes are 1-9, A-Z.

2.1.3 Service Version Change Code

The service version change code, which has to be recognizable for service and production departments, is used to indicate a production change that is considered as a major change affecting the “serviceability” of the product. A major change is occurring when a safety component is changed or when the servicer needs additional information to repair the set. E.g. when the software is changed or when an IC and its peripheral circuit are changed. Allowed characters are (A-Z, 0-

9) to be used in the following sequence: A-Z followed by 0-9.

2.1.4 Production year/week code

Indicates the actual week of set assembly. Made up of the last two digits of year plus production week.

2.1.5 Serial number

Safety regulations require that after a repair, you must return the unit in its original condition. Pay, in particular, attention to the following points:

• Route the wires/cables correctly, and fix them with the mounted cable clamps.

• Check the insulation of the mains lead for external damage.

• Check the electrical DC resistance between the mains plug and the secondary side:

1. Unplug the mains cord, and connect a wire between

the two pins of the mains plug.

2. Set the mains switch to the 'on' position (keep the

mains cord unplugged!).

3. Measure the resistance value between the mains plug

and the front panel, controls, and chassis bottom.

4. Repair or correct unit when the resistance

measurement is less than 1 MΩ.

5. Verify this, before you return the unit to the customer/

user (ref. UL-standard no. 1492).

6. Switch the unit ‘off’, and remove the wire between the

two pins of the mains plug.

2.2.2 Laser Safety

This unit employs a laser. Only qualified service personnel may remove the cover, or attempt to service this device (due to possible eye injury).

Laser Device Unit

Type : Semiconductor laser

GaAlAs

Wavelength : 650 nm (DVD)

: 780 nm (VCD/CD)

Output Power : 20 mW (DVD+RW

writing)

: 0.8 mW (DVD

reading)

: 0.3 mW (VCD/CD

reading)

Beam divergence : 60 degree

Figure 2-1

Note: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedure other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

The six digit serial numbers.

2.2 Safety Instructions

2.2.1 General Safety

Safety regulations require that during a repair:

• Connect the unit to the mains via an isolation transformer.

• Replace safety components, indicated by the symbol , only by components identical to the original ones. Any other component substitution (other than original type) may increase risk of fire or electrical shock hazard.

2.3 Warnings

2.3.1 General

• All ICs and many other semiconductors are susceptible to electrostatic discharges (ESD, ). Careless handling during repair can reduce life drastically. Make sure that, during repair, you are at the same potential as the mass of the set by a wristband with resistance. Keep components and tools at this same potential. Available ESD protection equipment: – Complete kit ESD3 (small tablemat, wristband,

connection box, extension cable and earth cable) 4822 310 10671.

Page 6

EN 6 DVDR730/0x2.

Safety Information, General Notes

– Wristband tester 4822 344 13999.

• Be careful during measurements in the live voltage section. The primary side of the power supply (pos. 1005), including the heatsink, carries live mains voltage when you connect the player to the mains (even when the player is 'off'!). It is possible to touch copper tracks and/or components in this unshielded primary area, when you service the player. Service personnel must take precautions to prevent touching this area or components in this area. A 'lightning stroke' and a stripe-marked printing on the printed wiring board, indicate the primary side of the power supply.

• Never replace modules, or components, while the unit is ‘on’.

2.3.2 Laser

• The use of optical instruments with this product, will increase eye hazard.

• Only qualified service personnel may remove the cover or attempt to service this device, due to possible eye injury.

• Repair handling should take place as much as possible with a disc loaded inside the player.

• Text below is placed inside the unit, on the laser cover shield:

CAUTION VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN VARNING SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN VARO! AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASER SÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN VORSICHT SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETSEN DANGER VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM ATTENTION RAYONNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE EN CAS D'OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU

intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be autorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Figure 2-2

2.3.3 Notes

Dolby

Manufactered under licence from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.

Figure 2-3

Trusurround

TRUSURROUND, SRS and symbol (fig 2-4) are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TRUSURROUND technology is manufactured under licence frm SRS labs, Inc.

Figure 2-4

Video Plus

“Video Plus+” and “PlusCode” are registered trademarks of the Gemstar Development Corporation. The “Video Plus+” system is manufactored under licence from the Gemstar Development Corporation.

Figure 2-5

Macrovision

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other

Page 7

3. Directions For Use

CHANNEL r Previous programme number

N Briefly press the button during playback: Previous chapter or previous

title

Hold down the button: Search backwards

Hold down the button during the still picture: slow motion backwards

STOP h Stop playback/recording, except with programmed recordings (TIMER)

Hold down button, opens and closes the disc tray.

PAUSE 9 If this button is pressed during playback, the DVD recorder switches to

pause. You will see a still picture.

If this button is pressed during recording, the DVD recorder will also

switch to pause.

O Briefly press the button during playback: Next chapter or next title

Hold down the button: Search forwards

Hold down button during still picture, slow motion forwards

0..9 For entering numbers or characters at the corresponding entry fields.

CLEAR To delete last entry or clear programmed recording (TIMER)

TV/MUTE y Switch TV sound on/off

Additional TV functions

This will only work with TV sets with the same remote control code *RC5) (e.g. Philips TV sets)

TV VOLUME q Increase TV volume

TV VOLUME r Reduce TV volume

TV/MUTE y Switch TV sound on/off

For the following functions you need to hold down the •TVbutton (on the left side) and then

select the function you need with the appropriate button.

STANDBY m Switch on/off TV set

0..9 Number buttons 0 - 9

CHANNEL q To select a higher programme number

CHANNEL r To select a lower programme number

Overview of functions

Directions For Use

EN 7DVDR730/0x 3.

Overview of functions

The remote control

REC/OTR n Record the current TV channel

STANDBY m To switch set on or off, interrupt menu function, interrupt a

programmed recording (TIMER)

system or to

alter/clear programmed recordings.

TIMER s To make a TIMER programming with/without ShowView

REC MODE To select the picture quality/ maximum possible record time/

ENGLISH

TV/DVD Switches the scart socket EXT2 AUX-I/O of the DVD recorder

PLAY MODE Choose between repeat, shuffle play and intro-scan

directly to the TV set. This lets you watch the picture from any unit

connected to this scart socket (set-top box', video recorder or satellite

receiver) and at the same time record from another source.

If you have not connected a device to the EXT2 AUX-I/O socket or

the device is switched off, you can use this button to switch between

TV reception and the signal of the DVD recorder.

But this only works if you use a scart cable to connect the TV set to

responds to this switch-over.

your DVD recorder ( EXT1 TO TV-I/O socket) and your TV set

MONITOR This button lets you switch between disc playback or the picture of the

internal tuner (TV channel).

DIM This button lets you change the brightness of the display to one of two

levels or switch it off.

some DVDs.

RETURN Return to previous menu on a video CD (VCD). This also works with

'(Chapter) directly from the menu bar using

'(Title)/'

B , A .

T/C Choose the '

ANGLE Select the camera angle

ZOOM Enlarge the picture

markers, for editing the photos in the 'Digital Photo Manager'

EDIT For displaying the edit menu for DVD+RW/+R discs, for setting chapter

If 'INFO' appears in the display, the index menu from a recorded disc or

an introductory film will be shown. In this case, this function is not

available.

internal tuner ( MONITOR key), select language 1 or 2.

AUDIO Selecting the audio language. For recording or during playback using the

SUBTITLE Select the subtitle language

Mamger'

PHOTO Open the 'Digital Photo Manager'

SELECT Select function/value/photos

DISC MENU To show the DVD menu or the index screen, to leave the 'Digital Photo

SYSTEM MENU Call up/cancel the main menu (menu bar at the top of the screen)

AB In den Menüs Cursortasten nach oben, unten.

DC Cursor buttons left, right in the menus.

OK Confirming of functions

PLAY G Play back a recorded disc.

CHANNEL q Next programme number

Page 8

EN 8 DVDR730/0x3.

Directions For Use

Overview of functions

Behind the flap at the righthand corner on the front

Back of the device

ENGLISH

4MAINS Connection to the mains supply (230V/50Hz)

ANTENNA IN Connection of the aerial

TV OUT Connection of the aerial cable to the TV set

EXT2 AUX-I/O Connection of an additional device (satellite receiver,

signals, input/output for CVBS (video) signals

EXT1 TO TV-I/O Connection of a TV set. Input for RGB, S-video

S-VIDEO OUT (Y/C) Connection of an S-Video compatible TV set

Output sockets (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)

VIDEO OUT (CVBS) Yellow cinch socket for the connection of a

TV set with video input (CVBS, Composite Video).

AUDIO OUT L/R White/red cinch socket for the connection of a TV

set with audio input sockets or an additional device.

(red/blue/green socket): Connection of an additional device

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Component Video output

with Component Video input (Interlaced/Progressive Scan)

COAX OUT

Output sockets (DIGITAL AUDIO OUT)

For the connection of a digital audio device using a coaxial

cable(cinch cable).

OPTICAL OUT

For the connection of a digital audio device using an optical cable

(Toslink).

set-top box, video recorder, camcorder, ...). Input for RGB,

S-video signals, input/output for CVBS (video) signals

VIDEO (CAM1) : Video input socket: Connection of

SVHS/Hi8 video recorders (programme number 'CAM1')

S-VIDEO (CAM1) : Connection of SVHS/Hi8 camcorders or

Yellow socket

AUDIO L/R (CAM1) : Audio input socket left/right :

camcorders or video recorders (programme number 'CAM1')

White/red socket

Connection of camcorders or video recorders (programme

number 'CAM1')

DV IN (CAM2) : digital video input (DV format only), IEEE 1394,

FireWire to connecting a digital camcorder or other suitable

device (programme number 'CAM2').

CHANNEL r and then CHANNEL q )

Switching between the sockets VIDEO (CAM1) , S-VIDEO (CAM1) is

done automatically. If a signal is available at both sockets at the same time,

the signal at the S-VIDEO (CAM1) socket has priority.

If you change the socket (unplug), you must re-select the socket. (Button

Front of the device

STANDBY-ON m : To switch device off / on, interrupt a function,

interrupt a programmed recording (TIMER).

: Red light around the disc tray indicates recording on a DVD+RW/+R.

OPEN/CLOSE J : Open/close disc tray.

MEDIA SLOT : Media Slot for PC (PCMCIA)-cards (adapters)

EJECT Eject PC-(PCMCIA) card

RECORD : Record the current TV channel

G : : Play back a recorded disc.

N : select previous title/search backwards

O : select next title/search forwards

h : Interrupt playback/recording

Page 9

A message appears on the screen announcing that the transfer

Connecting the DVD recorder

5 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY-ON m .

has started.

EasyLink

loading data from TV;

please wait

ENGLISH

'EASYLINK' appears on the display during transfer.PThe TV set transfers all saved TV channels, in the same order,

to the DVD recorder

This may take several minutes.OIf more installation menus appears on your TV set

Directions For Use

EN 9DVDR730/0x 3.

- confirm with OK .

For more information on the various functions see 'Initial

- select the line with B , A .

installation' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.

- confirm with C

- change the data with B , A or the number buttons 0..9

Initial installation is now complete.

Connection with 'Easy Link'

Connecting to the aerial

To receive TV programmes you have to connect the DVD-recorder to

Use this connection method if your TV set is equipped with 'Easy Link,

Cinema Link, NexTView Link, Q-Link, Smart Link, Megalogic, Datalogic,

the aerial or the cable network.

1 Switch off your TV set.

...'.

Please see your TV's operating instructions.

2 Remove the aerial cable plug from your TV set. Insert it into the

What is Easy-Link?

With the Easy Link function your DVD recorder can exchange information

ANTENNA IN socket at the back of the DVD recorder.

3 Insert one end of the supplied aerial cable into the TV

with your TV set. Your TV channels can also be transferred in the same

order from your TV set to your DVD recorder.

OUT socket at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end

Read the next chapter 'Connecting additional devices' on how

to connect additional devices (satellite receivers,

videorecorders,...) to the input-/output sockets.

socket EXT1 TO TV-I/O at the back of the DVD recorder and

the corresponding scart socket - suitable for Easylink - at the back

1 Switch off your TV set.

into the aerial input socket at the back of the TV set.

The aerial input socket of the TV set may be labeled ANT IN, RF

of the TV set (see TV set operating instructions).

2 Plug in a full-pin scart cable (all 21 contacts wired) into the scart

IN, 75 ohm, etc. Check your TV instructions for details.

4MAINS at the back of the DVD recorder with the wall outlet.

3 Switch on the TV set.

4 Use the supplied mains cable to connect the mains socket

The most important features of the DVD recorder will appear

in scrolling text on the display.

After the first installation is completed this function will be

switched off. How you switch on this function again, read in

the chapter 'User preferences' in the section 'standby'.

Connecting the DVD recorder

Preparing the remote control for

operation

The remote control and its batteries are packed separately in the

original DVD recorder packaging. You must install the batteries in the

remote control before use - described in the following section.

1 Take the remote control and the enclosed batteries (2 batteries).

'Aim' correctly

Its range is approximately 5 to 10 meters.

Aim the remote control at the DVD recorder and not at the TV set.

then close the battery compartment. Match the polarities (+ and -)

on the batteries with the diagram on the remote.

2 Open the battery compartment, insert the batteries as shown and

The remote control is now ready to use.

Page 10

EN 10 DVDR730/0x3.

Connecting the DVD recorder

Connecting to the mains

Always check if the local mains voltage matches the voltage range

printed on the type plate at the back or bottom of the DVD-recorder.

If not consult your dealer or the customer support from your country.

1 Switch on the TV set.

2 Insert one end of the supplied mains cable into the mains socket

4MAINS at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end

into the wall socket.

ENGLISH

Directions For Use

The most important features of the DVD recorder will appear

in scrolling text on the display.

After the first installation is completed this function will be

switched off.

Then, read the paragraph on 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD

recorder'.

Connection with video (CVBS) cable

This cable, usually with yellow Cinch connectors, is used for

transmitting the Composite Video signal (FBAS, CVBS). In this method

of transmission the colour signal and the brightness signal are

transmitted on the same cable. In certain circumstances, this can lead

to slight problems with the picture, such as 'Moiré' patterns.

1 Insert one end of a video (CVBS) cable into the yellow Cinch

separately. This mini DIN socket/plug is also called a Hosiden

socket/plug.

OUT (Y/C) socket at the back of the DVD recorder and the other

1 Insert one end of an S-Video(SVHS) cable into the S-VIDEO

Connection with an SVideo(Y/C)cable

This connecting cable, also known as the SVHS cable, is used to

transmit the brightness signal (Y signal) and colour signal (C signal)

and the other end into the video input socket (usually yellow) on

socket VIDEO OUT (CVBS) at the back of the DVD recorder

end into the S-Video (SVHS) input socket on the TV set (usually

labelled 'S-Video in' or 'SVHS in'. See TV operating instructions).

the TV set (usually labelled 'Video in' or 'AV in'. See TV operating

instructions).

socket AUDIO OUT L/R at the back of the DVD recorder and

2 Insert one end of an audio (Cinch) cable into the red/white Cinch

socket AUDIO OUT L/R at the back of the DVD recorder and

2 Insert one end of an audio (Cinch) cable into the red/white Cinch

the other end into the audio input socket (usually red/white) on

the TV set (usually labelled 'Audio in' or 'AV in'. See TV operating

the other end into the audio input socket (usually red/white) on

the TV set (usually labelled 'Audio in' or 'AV in'. See TV operating

instructions).

Read the next chapter 'Connecting additional devices' on how

to connect additional devices (satellite receivers,

Read the next chapter 'Connecting additional devices' on how

to connect additional devices (satellite receivers,

videorecorders,...) to the input-/output sockets.

Then, read the chapter on 'Connecting to the mains'.

Connection with the aerial cable only

To connect this DVD-Recorder to a TV set without external

Audio/Video input sockets, you need a modulator. With the modulator

the audio/video signal is converted in an UHF-channel. This signal can

be received and stored on the TV as a TV-station.

Connecting to the TV

Connecting the DVD recorder

If the function Easy Link is not supported from your TV set, choose

from the following connection methods:

Connection with scart cable

Connection with Svideocable

Connection with Video (CVBS) cable

Connection with the aerial cable only

Connection with scart cable

The scart or Euro AV cable serves as the universal connector for

picture, sound and control signals. With this type of connection, there

is practically no loss of quality in picture or sound transmission.

1 Plug a scart cable into the scart socket EXT1 TO TV-I/O at the

back of the DVD recorder and the scart socket for the DVD

recorder at the back of the TV set (see TV set operating

instructions).

Several scart sockets on the TV?

Read the next chapter 'Connecting additional devices' on how

to connect additional devices (satellite receivers,

Select the scart socket that is suitable for both video output and for

video input.

Selection menu for the scart socket?

On some TV sets select 'VCR' as the source for this scart socket. Read

your instruction manual for your TV set for further information.

videorecorders,...) to the input-/output sockets.

Then, read the chapter on 'Connecting to the mains'.

Page 11

Connecting additional devices

Connecting a camcorder to the front

sockets

To copy camcorder recordings, you can use the front sockets. These

sockets are located behind the flap on the right hand side.

Digital (DV) input socket

If you have a DV or Digital 8 camcorder, connect the DV IN

(CAM2) input of the DVD recorder to the appropriate DV output on

the camcorder.

Choose 'CAM2' as a programme number for this input.

ENGLISH

During recording on a DVD+RW/+R the original recording date and time

are stored as DVD subtitles.

On playback, this data can be displayed on the TV screen by using the '

function (Subtitle).

Svideo input socket

If you have a Hi8 or S-VHS(C) camcorder, connect the S-VIDEO

(CAM1) input of the DVD recorder to the appropriate S-VHS output

on the camcorder.

You must also connect the audio input AUDIO L/R (CAM1) on the

DVD recorder to the audio output on the camcorder.

Directions For Use

Choose 'CAM1' as a programme number for this input.

Video (CVBS) input socket

If you have a camcorder that only has a single video output (Composite

Video, CVBS), connect the VIDEO (CAM1) input on the DVD

recorder to the appropriate output on the camcorder.

You must also connect the audio input AUDIO L/R (CAM1) on the

DVD recorder to the audio output on the camcorder.

Choose 'CAM1' as a programme number for this input.

Connecting audio devices to the

analogue audio sockets

Two analogue audio sockets AUDIO OUT L/R (audio signal output

left/right) are located at the back of the DVD recorder.

These can be used to connect the following:

•) a receiver with Dolby Surround Pro Logic

•) a receiver with twochannel analogue stereo

Can I use the 'Phono' input on my amplifier?

This socket (input) on the amplifier is designed only for a record player

without preamplifiers. Do not use this input for connecting the DVD

recorder.

The DVD recorder or the amplifier may be damaged as a result.

EN 11DVDR730/0x 3.

Connecting additional devices only via

aerial cable

set-top box, cable TV box,...) provided for the TV set (usually

Connecting an external receiver

1 Connect the scart socket of the receiver (satellite receiver,

If you want to connect additional devices (e.g. satellite receiver...) only

labelled 'TV', 'TO TV',...) with the EXT2 AUX-I/O socket of the

via aerial cable, please observe the following:

If your external receiver offers several options for the signal

DVD recorder.

available at the 'TV', 'TO TV',... socket, choose the 'RGB'

The DVD-Recorder must be connected directly to the TV set. If there

setting.

is a video recorder or an additional device in between, the picture

quality may be poor because of the copy protection system built into

the DVD-Recorder.

Why can't I use the 'VCR', 'TO VCR',... socket?

In order to achieve the best possible picture quality, you must use the

RGB (red-green-blue) signal of the receiver. As a rule, this signal is

If there is interference in the picture when the additional device is

switched on, a TV broadcaster may be transmitting on the same

channel or a channel very close to that of the additional device. (e.g.:

TV broadcaster on channel 45, additional device (satellite receiver)

also on channel 45). In this case, change the channel of the additional

device (satellite receiver). Consult the instruction manual of the

additional device.

You must also store this channel on the DVD recorder to be able to

record TV programmes from the additional device (satellite receiver).

Switch on the additional device during the installation of the DVD recorder.

During the automatic channel search, the channel on which the additional

DVD recorder (additional device - DVD recorder - TV set). Only the

TV set must be connected to the TV OUT socket.

The additional device (satellite receiver) must be connected before the

available at the 'TV', 'TO TV',... socket. The DVD recorder transfers the

signal to the EXT1 TO TV-I/O socket.

Some receivers only provide a 'Video (CVBS/FBAS)' signal at the 'VCR',

'TO VCR'...socket.

If you are satisfied with the picture quality of the 'VCR', 'TO VCR',...

socket, you can also use this socket.

Read the instruction manual of the receiver which signals are available

at the sockets.

Connecting additional receivers

For additional receivers, you can also use the EXT1 TO

TV-I/O socket (if the TV set is connected to the COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT sockets), and VIDEO (CAM1) , S-VIDEO

(CAM1) sockets at the front. Please observe that you also have to

connect an audio cable to the AUDIO L/R (CAM1) socket.

device is transmitting will be stored as a TV channel.

Connecting additional devices to the

Connecting additional devices

second scart socket

You can connect additional devices such as decoders, satellite

receivers, camcorders, etc. to the EXT2 AUX-I/O socket.

When playback is started on this additional device the DVD recorder

automatically connects the EXT2 AUX-I/O scart socket with the

EXT1 TO TV-I/O scart socket. You will then see the picture from the

additional device on your TV set, even if the DVD recorder is switched

off.

The TV/DVD button on the remote control allows you to

switch between playback through the EXT2 AUX-I/O scart

socket and playback from the DVD recorder.

Connecting a video recorder, DVD player.

You can also connect a video recorder or a DVD player to the EXT2

AUX-I/O input socket.

The DVD recorder must be connected directly to the TV set ( EXT1

TO TV-I/O socket directly to the TV set). If there is a video recorder

in between the picture quality may be poor because of the copy

If you already have an external receiver (satellite receiver,

protection system built into the DVD recorder.

set-top box, cable TV box) connected to this socket, you can

connect the video recorder to the 'VCR', 'TO VCR', ...socket

of the external receiver.OYou can also use the front sockets S-VIDEO (CAM1) ,

VIDEO (CAM1) and the AUDIO L/R (CAM1) audio

sockets.

Page 12

EN 12 DVDR730/0x3.

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

Installation

Virgin mode

B or A .

2 Select the desired language for the on-screen menu by pressing

Initial installation

After successfully connecting your DVD recorder to the TV set and

other additional devices as described in the previous chapters, this

Menu Language

chapter will show you how to start the initial installation. The DVD

English

Español

Switching on additional devices

recorder automatically seeks and stores all available TV channels.

Français

Italiano

If you have connected additional devices such as a satellite receiver to the

Deutsch

aerial cable, switch them on. The automatic channel search will recognise it

Press OK to continue

and save it. Please observe that you must switch on a "test signal" for some

additional devices.

What is an on-screen menu?

No aerial connected

Even if you only want to use the DVD recorder to play back or have only

connected a satellite receiver, you must still complete the initial installation.

All settings and/or functions are displayed on your TV screen in the

This is necessary so that the basic settings are stored correctly. Once initial

relevant language.

installation is complete you can use the DVD recorder as normal.

3 Confirm with OK .

4 Select the desired audio language using B or A .

'PHILIPS' and then 'IS TV ON?' will appear on the display.PIf the connection was properly made and your TV was

1 Press STANDBY-ON m on the front of the DVD-recorder

automatically switched to the programme number for the

Virgin mode

input socket, e.g. 'EXT', '0', 'AV', you will see the following

picture:

English

Audio Language

Español

Français

Virgin mode

Português

Italiano

Press OK to continue

English

Menu Language

Español

Français

Italiano

Deutsch

What is an audio language?

The DVD will play the sound in the language you select, provided this

Press OK to continue

Virgin mode

English

Español

Français

Português

Subtitle Language

language is available on the disc. If it is not available on the disc the first

language on the DVD will be used instead. The DVD Video Disc menu,

if available, will also be displayed in the language you select.

My screen is empty.bDepending on the initialisation procedure it can take some time

5 Confirm with OK .

before the picture appears. Please press no button in the

meantime.bIf the TV set does not automatically switch to the programme

A .

6 Select the desired language for the subtitles by pressing B or

number of the input socket, select the corresponding programme

number on your TV set manually (see your TV's operating

instructions).bCheck that the scart cable is connected from the TV set to the

EXT1 TO TV-I/O socket on the DVD recorder. The EXT2

AUX-I/O socket is intended only for additional devices.

Italiano

Press OK to continue

Connecting audio devices to the digital

Connecting additional devices

audio sockets

At the back of the DVD recorder there are two digital audio output

sockets OPTICAL OUT for an optical cable and COAX OUT for a

coaxial cable (Cinch cable).

These can be used to connect the following:

•) an A/V receiver or an A/V amplifier with a digital

multichannel sound decoder

•) a receiver with twochannel digital stereo (PCM)

Digital multi-channel sound

All I can hear from my loudspeakers is a loud distorted

noisebThe receiver is not compatible with the digital audio format of the

DVD recorder. The audio format of the DVD disc is displayed in the

status window when you switch to another language. Playback in

six-channel digital surround sound is only possible if the receiver has

Digital multi-channel sound offers the best possible sound quality. You

will need a multi-channel A/V receiver or amplifier that supports at least

one of the audio formats of the DVD recorder (MPEG2 and Dolby

Digital).

Consult the operating instructions for your receiver to find out which

audio formats it supports.

a digital multi-channel sound decoder.

Page 13

Installation

ENGLISH

Directions For Use

EN 13DVDR730/0x 3.

The initial installation is now complete.

How to modify the channel settings or the time/date settings you will

to the DVD recorder, press OK .

B After you connect the aerial (or cable TV, satellite receiver, etc.)

Sound may be distorted on some TV channels.bIf the sound is distorted on any of the stored TV channels or if there is no

red on the following chapter.

The automatic TV channel search starts.

sound at all, the wrong TV system may have been stored for the TV

channel. Read 'Manual TV channel search' for information on how to

Autom. search

Installation

change the TV system.

Searching for TV channels

00 Channels found

Virgin mode

Using a satellite receiver

TV channels from a satellite receiver (connected to scart socket EXT2

AUX-I/O ) are received on the DVD recorder on programme number

h______________

Please wait

tuner.

Select programme number 'EXT1' with 0 on the remote control and

then select programme number 'EXT2' with CHANNEL r .

You should select the TV channels to be received by the satellite

take several minutes.

No TV-Stations found yet?bSelect channel 1 on the TV set. Can you see the stored TV channel

on the TV set?

receiver directly on the receiver itself.

If not, check the cable connection from the aerial (aerial socket) to

the DVD recorder and to the TV set.bPlease have patience.

The DVD recorder searches the entire frequency range in order to

find and save the largest possible number of TV channels.bIf you have not connected an aerial, go through all the basic settings

right to the end and then, if you wish, start the automatic search (see

'Automatic TV channel search').

When the automatic TV channel search is complete, 'Autom.

search complete' will appear on the TV screen along with

the number of TV channels found.P'Time', 'Year', 'Month', 'Date' will then appear on the TV

screen. It can take some time before this screen appears.

Please press no button in the meantime.

Virgin mode

Autom. search

Autom. search complete

00 Channels found

Time 20:01

Year 2004

To continue

Press OK

Month 01

Date 01

If required, change the data with the number buttons 0..9 on

Select the line with A or B .

your remote control.

'Date'.

C Check the displayed settings for 'Time', 'Year', 'Month' and

À If all informations are correct, save by pressing OK .

'EXT2'

If necessary, use the MONITOR button to switch to the internal

'WAIT' will appear on the display.

Wait until all available TV channels have been found. This can

What is the subtitle language?

The subtitles will be displayed in the language you select, provided this

language is available on the disc. If it is not available on the disc the fist

language on the DVD will be used instead.

Installation

4:3 letterbox

4:3 panscan

16:9

TV Shape

7 Confirm with OK .

8 Select the desired screen format position using B or A .

Press OK to continue

'4:3 letterbox'

for a 'wide-screen' (cinema format) picture with black bars at

the top and bottom.O'4:3 panscan'

for a full-height picture with the sides trimmed.O'16:9'

for a wide-screen TV set (screen edge ratio 16:9)

If your country does not appear, select 'Other'.

9 Confirm with OK .

0 Select the country of your residence with B or A .

Austria

Country

Belgium

Denmark

Finland

France

Press OK to continue

Why do I have to set the country?

To call up the specific settings for the respective country, you must first

install the country.

A screen appers with a message about the connection of the

aerial.

It can take some time before this screen appears. Please press

no button in the meantime.

A Confirm with OK .

Page 14

EN 14 DVDR730/0x3.

Manual search

Installation

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

To store

Press OK

Channel/freq. CH

Entry/search 01

Programme number 01

TV channel name BBC1

Decoder Off

TV system PAL-BG

NICAM On

Fine tuning 0

Additional installation features

4 Select 'Manual search' using B or A and confirm with C .

Please observe the colour sequence

The colours of the sockets at the DVD recorder and the connectors

- Confirm with OK .

Change the TV system of the TV channel:

-In'TV system', use D or C to select the TV system that

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

produces the least distortion of picture and sound.

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

NICAM

The menu bar appears.

- If reception is poor and the sound distorted you can turn off

' symbol with D or C .

2 Select '

- hange the character at the desired position with B or A .

search.

Press C in the line 'Entry/search' to start the automatic

A changing channel number/frequency number will appear on

the TV screen.

Continue the automatic search until you have found the TV

'Freq.'(Frequency), 'CH'(Channel), 'S-CH'(Special/hyperband

station using the number buttons 0..9 .

channel)

5 In 'Channel/freq.', select the desired display using C .

must match those of the socket colours at the TV set

(red-red/blue-blue/green-green). If they don't, the colours of the picture

may get mixed up or the picture may not be visible.

AUDIO OUT L/R at the back of the DVD recorder with the

most coloured red/white audio input socket of your TV set

(usually labelled 'Audio in' or 'AV in'. See the instruction manual of

your TV set.)

(Progressive Scan) input sockets. If there is a switch or selection

on your TV-set between 'Interlaced' and 'Progressive scan' select

'Progressive scan'.

8 Use an audio (cinch) cable, connect the red/white cinch socket

You may need to refer to your TV operating instructions.

9 If necessary, switch the TV set to the component video

6 In 'Entry/search', enter the frequency or channel of the TV

The menu of the DVD recorder should now appear on the TV

screen. If not, check the cable connections and the settings on

your TV set.OIf necessary store this setting on your TV set.

channel you are looking for.

0 End with SYSTEM MENU .

number you want to use for the TV channel, e.g. '01'.

7 Using D or C in 'Programme number', select the programme

Manual TV channel search

In some cases, not all of the available TV channels may have been found

8 Press OK to store the TV channel.

and stored during initial installation. In this case, you will need to search

for and store the missing or coded TV channels manually.

9 To search for other TV channels, begin again at

With 'Easy Link', the DVD recorder will automatically download the TV

Change the name of a TV channel:

-In'TV channel name', press C .

channels stored on the TV set. This is why some lines have no function. To

store new TV channels, they must first be stored on the TV set. The

- Select the next character position in the same way.

- Select the desired character position using D or C .

information will then be transferred to the DVD recorder automatically.

NICAM.

C in the line 'Fine tuning'.

In 'NICAM', select 'Off' using C .

Fine tuning

- You can try fine tune the TV channel manually with D ,

0 To end, press SYSTEM MENU .

3 Select 'Installation' using B or A and confirm with C .

Connection using a component video

Allocating a decoder

Additional installation features

(Y Pb Pr/YUV) cable

Some TV channels send coded TV signals that can only be viewed

properly with a purchased or rented decoder. You can connect such a

Component video (Y Pb Pr) is the highest quality picture transmission

option. This is achieved by dividing the video signal into a luminance

signal (Y) and two colour difference signals - red minus luminance (V)

decoder (descrambler) to your DVD recorder. The following function

automatically activates the connected decoder for the TV channel you

want to watch.

' symbol using B or A and confirm with C .



' symbol with D or C .

The menu bar appears.

internal tuner.

2 Select '

2 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

3 Select the '

The menu bar appears.

and blue minus luminance (U). As a rule, "Cr, Pr" or "R-Y" is used to

describe the red difference signal and "Cb, Pb" or "B-Y" the blue

difference signal.

These signals are transmitted through separate lines. The connectors of

this cable and the corresponding sockets are usually green (luminance,

Y), blue (U, Pb, Cb, B-Y), and red (V, Pr, Cr, R-Y).

Attention!

If you choose this type of connection, the DVD recorder must already

be connected and completely installed (initial installation complete).

Switching of the signal to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT sockets is

carried out in a menu that is not yet available during the initial

installation.

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

If necessary, use the MONITOR button to switch to the

number buttons 0..9 on the remote control to select the TV

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

channel for which you want to use the decoder.

1 Use the CHANNEL q and CHANNEL r buttons or the

Preparation:

set). Settings cannot then be made in this menu.

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

If your TV set supports 'Easy Link' the decoder must be assigned to the

relevant TV channel on the TV set (see the operating instructions for your TV

with C .

4 Select the line 'Component video output' using B and confirm

' symbol with D or C .

3 Select '

4 Select 'Installation' using B or A and confirm with C .

'Progressive Scan' only if your TV has Progressive Scan.

5 Select the setting you need with SELECT . Choose

5 Select 'Manual search' using B or A and confirm with C .

6 Confirm with OK .

Manual search

Installation

For more information on the other settings, read section 'Picture

settings' ('Video output') in chapter 'User preferences'.

Channel/freq. CH

Entry/search 01

Programme number 01

TV channel name BBC1

Decoder Off

TV system PAL-BG

NICAM On

sockets (red, blue, green) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT at the

back of the DVD recorder with the corresponding three

component video (progressive scan) input sockets of your TV set,

usually labelled 'Component Video Input', 'YUV Input', 'YPbPr',

'YCbCr' or simply 'YUV'.

Warning!

Do not confuse these sockets with the five-component RGB

sockets (if available) or the yellow video (CVBS/FBAS) socket and

the two audio sockets (red/white). The five-component RGB

sockets are only provided for the R-G-B-H-V signals (red, green,

7 Use a component video (Y Pb Pr) cable, connect the three cinch

To store

Press OK

Fine tuning 0

To switch off the decoder use C to select 'Off' (Decoder

switched off).

blue with horizontal and vertical synchronisation impulse).

6 Select 'Decoder' using B or A .

8 Confirm with OK .

9 To end, press SYSTEM MENU .

7 Select 'On' with C .

Your decoder has now been allocated to this TV channel.

Page 15

Additional installation features

Setting the language/country

You can select the country and, for the basic setting of DVD playback,

the language for the subtitles and the audio language.

Please note that with some DVDs the audio language and/or subtitle

language can be changed only via the DVD menu.

Directions For Use

EN 15DVDR730/0x 3.

ENGLISH

Language

Playback audio English

Recording audio Language 1

Subtitle English

Menu English

Country Other

' symbol with D or C .

' with B or A and confirm with the C button.



The menu bar appears.

3 Select '

For bilingual shows, you can also select the sound channel of the TV

station via the internal tuner ( MONITOR button) for recording or

playback.

Preparation:

•) The TV set is switched on, and if necessary, the programme number for the

DVD recorder has been selected.

•) the DVD recorder is switched on.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU on the remote control.

2 Select '

Playback audio

The DVD will play back in the language you have chosen.O'Subtitle'

Subtitle languageO'Menu'

You have the option of setting one of the displayed languages

for the on-screen menu (OSD). However, the DVD recorder

display will only display English text regardless of this setting.

4 Select the appropriate line and confirm with C .

To exit press

SYSTEM MENU

OK .

5 Select the appropriate setting using B or A and confirm with

6 To end, press SYSTEM MENU .

Sorting and deleting TV channels

manually

8 Wait until for example 'TV 02' appears in the display.

With this function you can rearrange the TV channels already stored or

TV 02

to delete TV channels you don't want or those with poor reception.

EasyLink

With Easylink, you can search for and store TV channels only on the TV

9 Select the next programme number on the TV set, e.g. '2'.

0 Confirm with OK on the DVD recorder remote control.

set. These settings are then transferred to the DVD recorder.

That is why you cannot select this function manually.

If you confirmed the wrong TV channel, you can delete the

Preparation:

last allocation with D .

•) The TV set is switched on, and if necessary, the programme number for the

DVD recorder has been selected.

until you have assigned all the TV

A Repeat steps

7 Using B or A , shift the TV channel to the desired position and

press the D button.

'Manual TV channel search'.

The DVD recorder will insert the TV channel.

until you have resorted/deleted all the TV

8 Repeat steps

channels you want.

9 To store, press OK .

0 To end, press SYSTEM MENU .

...

P02 BBC2

P03 ITV

P04

P05

P06

• P01 BBC1

These settings are accepted by the DVD recorder. Use this function to start

the transfer of TV channels from the TV set.

...

To sort

Press ›

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

5 Using B or A select the TV channel that you want to delete or

The menubar appears on the screen.

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

whose order you want to change.

' icon using D or C .

2 Select the '

6 Confirm with C .

Deleting TV channels

Unwanted channels or those with poor reception can be

deleted using CLEAR .

4 To end, press SYSTEM MENU .

3 Select 'Installation' using B or A and confirm with C .

You can read about how to search for a TV channel manually in

Sort TV channels

Installation

' icon using D or C .

The menubar appears on the screen.

•) the DVD recorder is switched on.

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

channels from your TV set.

B To end, press SYSTEM MENU .

2 Select the '

Automatic TV channel search

3 Wählen Sie mit der Taste B oder A die Zeile 'Installation' und

bestätigen Sie mit der Taste C .

If the channel assignments of your cable or satellite TV provider change

4 Select 'Sort TV channels' using B or A and confirm with C .

or if you are reinstalling the DVD recorder, e.g. after moving house,

My TV set has Easylink

With Easylink, you can search for and store TV channels only on the TV set.

you can start this procedure again. This will replace the stored TV

channels with the new ones.

Sorting TV channels automatically

Additional installation features

(Follow TV)

This function changes the order of the TV channels stored in your

TV 01

' symbol with D or C .

The menu bar appears.

If your TV set supports 'Easylink,..', TV channels will be stored during initial

installation in the same order as they appear on the TV set. To store the TV

channels in a different order, you'll need to change the order on the TV set.

When you start the Follow TV function the information is transferred again

from the TV set.

DVD recorder to match the order on the TV set.

This only works if the DVD recorder ( EXT1 TO TV-I/O socket) and

the TV set are connected with a scart cable.

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the DVD

recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

3 Select 'Installation' using B or A and confirm with C .

2 Select '

4 Select line 'Follow TV' with B or A . and confirm with the

C button.

'TV 01' will appear in the DVD recorder display.

5 Confirm the message on the screen with OK .

6 Select programme number '1' on the TV set.

I cannot switch my TV set to programme number '1'bIf you have connected additional devices to the EXT2 AUX-I/O socket,

please disconnect these devices. Other connected devices may have

switched the TV set to the programme number of the scart socket.

'WAIT' will appear in the display.PThe DVD recorder compares the TV channels on the TV set

7 Confirm with OK on the DVD recorder remote control.

and the DVD recorder.

If the DVD recorder finds the same TV channel as on the TV

set it stores it at 'P01'.

'NOTV' will appear in the display.

The DVD recorder is not receiving a video signal from the TV set.bChech the connectors at both ends of the scart cable.bCheck your TV's operating instructions to see which scart socket is used

for video signals.bIf the problem persists, you won't be able to use this feature.

Please read 'Sorting and deleting TV channels manually'.

Page 16

EN 16 DVDR730/0x3.

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

Information on the screen of your TV

Field for temporary messages

The top left corner of the menu line contains a field for temporary

messages relating to the various operating modes. This information

You can check or change many of the functions and settings of your

DVD recorder via the system menu bar. The menu bar cannot be

displayed during recording.

ShuffleScanRepeat entire discRepeat titleRepeat trackRepeat chapterRepeat from A to the endRepeat from A to BCamera angle

appears briefly on the screen when certain disc functions have been

activated:



Symbols in the menu bar

Press SYSTEM MENU to open and close the menu bar (main menu).

Use D and C to select the relevant function.

Use B to confirm the function and go either to another menu or

execute the function directly.

Some functions may not be available, depending on the disc inserted.

Menu bar 1

User preferences

Title/track

Child lock enabled



Subtitle language

Audio language

Chapter/index

Resume playbackIllegal action



Camera angle

Zoom

Status field

Menu bar 2

The status field shows the current operating mode (status) of the DVD

VideoCD

DVDVideo

Fast motion

Slow motion

No disc

Search by time

Error

DVD+R

pressing C again.

DVD+RW

Disc type symbols

Sound

Frame advance

recorder and the type of disc inserted. This display can be switched off.

While menu bar 1 is being displayed you can go to menu bar 2 by

Setting the time and date

Additional installation features

If the display shows an incorrect time or '--:--', the time and date must

SMART CLOCK

be reset manually.

'SMART CLOCK' automatically sets the time and date using the information

transmitted by the TV channel. Normally the TV channel stored at

programme number 'P01' is used. In the 'Clock preset' line you can

select the programme number (channel name) whose TV channel transmits

this information.

If the time/date is not displayed correctly you need to choose the 'Off'

setting in the 'Clock preset' line and set the date and time manually.

The menu bar appears.

1 Press SYSTEM MENU on the remote control.

To exit press

SYSTEM MENU

Time 20:00

Year 2004

Month 01

Date 01

Clock preset 01

Time/Date

Installation

' symbol with D or C .

4 Select 'Time/Date' using B or A and confirm with C .

3 Select 'Installation' using B or A and confirm with C .

2 Select '

5 Change the time in 'Time' using the number buttons 0..9 on your

remote control.

6 Check 'Year', 'Month' and 'Date' in the same way. Select the

entry field with the B or A button.

Time/date is displayed incorrectly despite manual settingbWith 'SMART CLOCK', time/date is transferred from the TV channel

saved on 'P01' and automatically corrected.

You can either enter another TV channel for transferring the data or

disable the function.

In the line 'Clock preset' select the relevant TV channel with

'Stored' will appear briefly on the screen.

D or C . To disable, select 'Off'.

7 Check the displayed settings and confirm with OK .

8 To end, press SYSTEM MENU .

Page 17

Playback

ENGLISH

Directions For Use

EN 17DVDR730/0x 3.

Inserting a disc

1 Press the OPEN/CLOSE J button on the front.

General notes on playback

With this DVD recorder you can play back the following systems:

•) DVD Video

•) (Super)Video CD Disc

OPENING P01

•) DVD+RW Disc

•) DVD+R Disc

•) DVD-RW (video mode, finalised)

•) DVD-R

The disc tray will open. While the disc tray is opening, the

•) CD-R

display shows 'OPENING' and then 'TRAY OPEN' when the tray

is fully open.

•) CD-RW

•) Audio CD

2 Carefully place the disc in the tray with the label facing up and

•) MP3-CD

•) Picture -CD (JPEG-data)

press PLAY G or OPEN/CLOSE J .

You can operate the video recorder using the remote control or the

'CLOSING' and then 'READING' will appear in the display. The

information on the disc will be read.

The display will read 'PIN'bThe child lock has been activated for the inserted disc. Read the sections

buttons on the front of the DVD recorder.

How do I insert a double-sided DVD?

Double-sided discs do not have labelling over the whole surface. The labelling

for each side is in the centre of the disc. To play a side its label must be

on 'Child lock' and 'Releasing a disc' in the chapter on 'Access control

(child lock).aThe menu on the screen is showing an 'X'bSome DVD discs can be manufactured so that certain steps are required

facing up.

Opening/closing the tray using the remote control

You can open and close the disc tray using the remote control.

Press and hold the STOP h button on the remote control until the dialog

before the disc can be played, or so that only limited operation is possible

during playback. When an 'X' appears on the screen the selected feature

is not possible.aThe screen is showing regional code information

box shows 'OPENING'or'CLOSING'.

Since DVD films are not normally released in all parts of the world at the

same time, all DVD players have a specific regional code. Discs can be

given a regional code. If the regional codes differ between the player and

Playing a DVD video disc

the disc, playback is not possible.bThe regional code is shown on the label on the back of the machine.bThe regional code does not apply to recordable DVDs.aI can see the message 'EMPTYDISC'bThe disc does not contain any recordings.a'DISC ERR' will appear on the displaybRecording could not be completed correctly because of a disc error. Check

A menu may appear when a DVD is played back. If the titles and

chapters are numbered, press a number button on the remote control.

You can also use the D , C , A , B buttons or number

buttons 0..9 to select a menu item and confirm with OK .OYou can also access the menu using DISC MENU on the

the disc and clean it if necessary.aA dialog box appears asking you whether you want to delete

the contents or eject the discbThe disc inserted is a DVD+RW but its contents are not DVD

remote control.

video-compatible (e.g. a data disc). Recordings on this disc can only be

1 If playback does not start automatically, press PLAY G .

made if the entire disc is first deleted with the REC/OTR n button.

title/chapter number, elapsed time will appear on the display.

C01 2:04

2 To stop playback, press STOP h on the remote control or

h on the DVD recorder.

3 To remove the disc, press OPEN/CLOSE J on the front of the

DVD recorder.

Information on the screen of your TV

Timer information box

This box appears above the tuner information box. When a timer

Recording

Operating mode symbols

recording is set, it shows the timer icon and the start time or date of

Stop

the first programme to be recorded.

If no timer recording is scheduled, the current time is displayed.

This box disappears during playback of a disc or after a recording

PlaybackPause

Playback

Timer starts on the day/time shown

starts. However, you can access it during an OTR recording by

pressing SYSTEM MENU .

RecordPause

Search forwards (8x speed)YSearch backwards (8x speed)

OTR recording runs until the stop time displayed

Current time

No timer event programmed

Slow motion

Tuner information box

This field is located in the bottom left-hand corner of the screen. The

aerial signal, the TV channel and the TV channel name for the selected

programme are displayed.

Current channel/selected input socket

No signal

you can watch the picture of the selected TV channel or the signal on

the input socket.

' and confirm with C



1 In the system menu (button SYSTEM MENU ) select the symbol

'Offto switch this picture off.

2 In the line 'Live source view' select 'On' to view this picture or

3 End with OK and then SYSTEM MENU .

Copyprotected signal

The TV channel is not available/the additional device is not

connected or it is switched off

'Live picture' in the 'Tuner information box'

Instead of the information about the aerial signal or the TV channel,

Page 18

EN 18 DVDR730/0x3.

Playback

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

Playing a (Super) Video CD

Playing an MP3 CD

MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer-3) files are highly compressed music files.

Using this technology the data volume can be compressed by a factor

(Super) Video CDs may be equipped with PBC (Play Back Control).

of 10. This means it is possible to record 10 hours of music in CD

quality on a single CD-ROM.

This means that special playback functions (menus) can be directly

selected. The video CD must be PBC compatible (see CD case).

'PBC' is active in the default settings.

1 Insert a (Super) Video CD.

When creating MP3 CDs please note the following:

File system: ISO9660

Directory structure: maximum of 8 levels

Formats: *.mp3

If the 'h' symbol appears in the display, start playback by

pressing PLAY G .OIf a menu appears on the screen, use the remote control

Filenames: maximum of 12 characters (8+3)

Maximum of 32 albums, 999 titles

Supported sampling frequencies: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz). Music with

buttons indicated on the screen to select the menu option you

sampling frequencies other than these will be skipped.

Supported bit rates: 32, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256 (kbit/s)

want (PREV= N , NEXT= O ) or with the number

buttons 0..9 .OIf a PBC menu consists of a list of titles, you can select a title

ID3 Tag: Version 1, 1.1. In later versions the directory name is

displayed as the album and the filename as the title.

directly.OUse RETURN to go back to the previous menu

Important notes for playback:

Only the first session of a multi-session CD will play back.

2 Stop playback using STOP h .

Playback starts automatically.

1 Insert an MP3 CD.

MP3 CD display

If the TV is on, the MP3 CD screen appears automatically.

During playback, the current track number and its elapsed playing time

will be shown on the TV screen and on the recorder display.

During stopped playback ( STOP h button) the numbers of the

albums will be shown on the TV screen and on the display.

Further information on the album, track and artist will also be displayed

if included in the ID tag.

The number of albums is displayed in the display.OUsing N or O select the next or previous title.OYou can also use the T/C button to select titles and albums.

2 Stop playback using STOP h .

- Press the T/C button and use the C or D button to select

the 'T' symbol for title or 'C' for chapter. Use the B or

A buttons or the number buttons 0..9 on the remote

control to select the number of the title/chapter.

You can also use the repeat functions ( PLAY

MODE button).

Playing a DVD+RW/ +R disc

Playback

starts automatically.

1 If the disc is write-protected or a finalised DVD+R disc, playback

C01 ANNA P01

to select the title you want to play on the index screen.

2 If playback does not start automatically, use the B or A button

You can also use the or button on the front.

With N , O you can jump to the begin or the end of the index

screen.

title/chapter number, elapsed time will appear on the display.

3 Press the PLAY G button.

I can see the message 'EMPTYDISC'bThe disc does not contain any recordings.

4 To stop playback, press STOP h on the remote control or

h on the DVD recorder.

5 To remove the disc, press OPEN/CLOSE J on the front of the

DVD recorder.

Playing an audio CD

You can also use the DVD recorder to play audio CDs

If the TV is on, the audio CD screen appears automatically.

During playback, the current track number and its elapsed playing time

will show on the TV screen and on the recorder display.

Playback starts automatically.

1 Insert an audio CD.

2 Stop playback using STOP h .

The number of tracks and the total time are displayed.

Page 19

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

EN 19DVDR730/0x 3.

' icon using C .

Additonal playback features

Camera angle

Repeat/Shuffle play

If a DVD contains scenes that have been shot from different camera

angles you can select these camera angles for playback.

You can mark entire sections or the whole disc for endless playback.

Depending on the type of disc (DVD video, DVD+RW, video CD) you

angle.

' symbol will remain visible until a scene starts for

which there is only one camera angle.

The '

Zoom feature

The DVD recorder switches to 'PAUSE'. You will see a still

picture.

When 'press OK to pan' appears on the screen, the zoom

process is complete.

The Zoom feature allows you to enlarge the video image and pan

through the enlarged image.

2 Select the required zoom factor using B or A .

1 During playback, press ZOOM .

you wish to view.

3 Press OK . Using A , B , C , D select the part of the image

4 Confirm with OK .

5 To stop the feature, press PLAY G and then SYSTEM MENU .

' using

1 During playback, press PAUSE 9 .

You will see a still picture.

' symbol will be hidden

The '

The selected scene has been shot from only one camera angle. This

2 Press SYSTEM MENU and select the '

feature is therefore not available. For more information please read

the cover of your DVD disc.

You can also directly enter the number with the number

3 Select the required camera angle with B or A .

buttons 0..9 .PAfter a short time, playback will resume from the new camera



' appears on the screen.



Press PLAY G to start playback.

4 When the end point is reached press OK .

' appears on the TV screen.



Playback now takes place within these points.

You can also keep pressing the PLAY MODE button until

5 To end the repeat, press the STOP h button.

the displays disappear.

Scan feature

This feature plays back the first 10 seconds of each chapter (DVD) or

track (CD).

STOP h and then PLAY G .

After 10 seconds the DVD recorder switches to the next

chapter/index.OTo start playback at the relevant chapter/index press

PLAY MODE .

1 During playback, press PLAY MODE . Select '

': repeat track/title

': repeat entire disc (Video CD, Audio CD only)

': Shuffle

': repeat chapter (DVD only)

You can also keep pressing the PLAY MODE button until

•) Display disappears: no repeat

3 To end the repeat, press the STOP h button.

the displays disappear.

Repeating a passage (AB)









•) '

2 During playback, press PLAY MODE . By pressing PLAY

MODE again you can chose from the following options:

•) '

playback.

can select a chapter, title or the entire disc.

1 Select the desired chapter, title or the entire disc and start

You can repeat a particular passage within a title/chapter. You need to

indicate the start and end of the passage.

1 During playback press PAUSE 9 at the start point.

You will see a still picture.

The start point is now saved.

2 Keep pressing PLAY MODE until '

Still picture

General

Additonal playback features

still picture.

1 During playback, press PAUSE 9 to stop playback and display a

DVD's are divided in titles and chapters.

During playback, press O to go to the next title. If there

C01 2:04

are several chapters within a title, the next chapter.

Press N to return to the start of the current title/chapter.OPress N twice to return to the start of the previous

Frame advance via menu bar

- During a still picture press SYSTEM MENU on the remote control.

The menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.

title/chapter.

Use the T/C (title/chapter) button

' symbol using C or D and confirm with B .

- Select the '

- Press T/C (title/chapter) and then use A or B to select the

- You can now use the D or C button to go forwards or backwards

one frame at a time.

appropriate title.

Make sure the symbol 'T' (title) is selected in the menu bar.

- If necessary, switch the menu bar off with the SYSTEM

MENU button.

select the 'C' symbol (chapter).

Now select the appropriate chapter with A or B .

-Use T/C to select chapters within a title. Press T/C and use C to

2 To continue playback, press PLAY G .

Slow motion

Searching a disc

1 During playback press PAUSE 9 on the remote control. Now

').

You can search the disc for a recording at 4x, 8x or 32x playback

speed. Other speeds can only be selected via the menu bar ('

hold down N or O to switch to slow motion.

1 During playback, press and hold N (reverse) or O (forwards)

You can switch between different speeds using N or O .

You can switch between the playback speeds using

to switch to the search feature.

' symbol using C or D and confirm with B .

- You can now use the D or C button to select different forward and

backward slow motion speeds.

- If necessary, switch the menu bar off with the SYSTEM

Slow motion via menu bar

- During playback press PAUSE 9 and then SYSTEM MENU on

the remote control. The menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.

MENU button.

- Select the '

2 To continue playback, press PLAY G twice.

' symbol using C or D and confirm with B .

Search by time

Using this feature you can select where playback should start (select

elapsed time).

The menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.

1 During playback press SYSTEM MENU on the remote control.

' symbol using C or D and confirm with B .

2 Select the '

Playback is stopped and a box appears on the screen showing

the elapsed time.

should start.

3 Enter the start time with the digit keys 0..9 from where playback

The time entered will flash on the screenbThe selected title is shorter than the time entered. Enter a new time

or cancel the function by pressing SYSTEM MENU .

4 Confirm with OK .

5 Playback starts at the time you entered.

N / O .

No soundbThe sound is switched off in search mode. This is not a fault in your

2 To continue playback, press PLAY G at your chosen location.

machine.

- You can now use the D or C button to select different forward and

backward search speeds.

- If necessary, switch the menu bar off with the SYSTEM

MENU button.

Search feature via menu bar

- During playback press SYSTEM MENU on the remote control.

The menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.

- Select the '

- To continue playback, press PLAY G .

Page 20

EN 20 DVDR730/0x3.

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

Disc Manager (DM)

When I insert a disc I see a number on the screen in the

index picture screen in the top left-hand cornerbYou have inserted a disc that has already been registered by the Disc

Manager.

General information

The 'Disc Manager' is an integrated database in the DVD recorder that

remembers all recordings on DVD+RW/+R discs made by this DVD

2 Press the DISC MANAGER button on the remote control.

recorder. This gives you a complete overview of your entire video

collection at the touch of a button. The Disc Manager gives you quick

3 Select 'Add current disc' using A or B and confirm with C .

and easy access to every recording made on with this DVD

recorder. The Disc Manager also tells you which film was recorded on

The disc number will be added to the Disc Manager.PThe disc number is then displayed and the disc tray opens

4 Confirm with OK .

which disc and how many unrecorded minutes remain on the discs.

And: You can go automatically to the beginning of the selected

automatically.

How many discs can I save in the Disc Manager?

recording and start playback.

The disc is now stored in the Disc Manager under the

You can store up to 999 discs on this DVD recorder. The maximum number

displayed disc number.

Please write this number on the disc and on the cover.

of titles is more than 9,000. The maximum number of titles per disc is 49.

Why do I need to label the discs?

Caution when recording with other DVD recorders

Don't use a disc stored in the Disc Manager for recording on other DVD

Disc Manager

Find title C04

Browse discs Disc number001

Remove a disc Disc number001

When searching for unrecorded free space or available recordings, you

will asked to insert the appropriate discs (disc numbers).

5 To end, press DISC MANAGER .

recorders. If you use a disc to record on another DVD recorder, then this

disc will no longer be recognised by the Disc Manager. In this case, delete

the disc from the Disc Manager's memory and then add it after it has been

recorded.

Adding 'child-proof discs'

If you want to add child-proof discs you need to enter the PIN code.

Removing discs from the Disc Manager

The DVD recorder will immediately recognise that this disc is saved in

the Disc Manager. When this disc is inserted the disc number will

appear in the title overview in the top left-hand corner.

Every DVD+RW/+R is stored with a number in the Disc Manager

(DM). You can remove this disc number from the Disc Manager to use

Adding a disc to the Disc Manager

You can only add DVD+RW or DVD+R discs to the Disc Manager

since other discs do not hold any information on the titles or lengths of

the Disc Manager's memory for new discs or to remove damaged discs

the recordings. These discs have to be at least once recorded in the

from memory.

DVD-Recorder. A table of content have to be available.

DVD+R discs can also be finalised. Other discs cannot be added to the

1 Press DISC MANAGER on the remote control.

2 Select 'Remove a disc' using A or B and confirm with C .

Recordings are saved automatically

Disc Manager.

On a disc that has been added to the Disc Manager, you can make new

recordings as often as you like using this DVD recorder. The titles of these

recordings will be stored in the Disc Manager automatically.

Preparation:

Add current disc Next free disc number= 001

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

To exit press DM

1 Insert the DVD+RW/+R disc that you want to add in the DVD

recorder.

3 Select the disc number with A or B and confirm with OK .

Disc Manager

Disc contents are not deleted.

Find title C04

Browse discs Disc number001

The disc is only removed from the Disc Manager's memory. Its contents

remain unchanged.

Remove a disc Disc number001

Add current disc Next free disc number= 001

4 To end, press DISC MANAGER .

To exit press DM

Select the audio language

Additonal playback features

Many pre-recorded DVD discs have more than one audio language.

The language initially selected for playback will be the one you selected

You can also enter the number directly using the number

buttons 0..9 .PPlay continues in the new audio language.

when you first set up the DVD recorder. However you can change the

audio language of the inserted disc at any time.

You can change the audio language either using the menu of the

inserted disc ( DISC MENU button) or the AUDIO button. The audio

languages for DVD playback in the two menus may be different. Please

note that with some DVDs the audio language and/or subtitle language

can be changed only via the DVD menu.

1 During playback press AUDIO .

2 Select the required audio language using B or A .

Subtitles

Many pre-recorded DVD discs have more than one subtitle language.

The language initially selected for playback will be the one you selected

when you first set up the DVD recorder. However you can change the

subtitle language of the inserted disc at any time.

You can change the subtitle language either using the menu of the

inserted disc ( DISC MENU button) or the SUBTITLE button. The

subtitle languages in the menus may differ.

Select the required subtitle language using B or A .

1 During playback press SUBTITLE .

You can also enter the number directly using the number

buttons 0..9 .OYou can switch off subtitles again with 0 or by pressing 'off'.PPlayback continues in the new subtitle language.

Page 21

Disc Manager (DM)

ENGLISH

Directions For Use

EN 21DVDR730/0x 3.

Searching for a blank section

You can search for space for a new recording on the disc (at least 1

minute of blank space), for example at the end of existing recordings.

This only works with discs which have already been stored in the Disc

Manager.

1 Press DISC MANAGER on the remote control.

Disc Manager

Disc number 001

Title Date Duration

Browse discs

A list of the recordings on the disc you have selected will

appear on the TV screen.

3 Confirm with OK .

2 Select 'Browse discs' using A or B .

enough space for the recording.

4 Use A or B to select a disc (disc number) on which there is

Disc Manager

How can I see how much space is available for the recording?

Disc number 001

Title Date Duration

Browse discs

The space available is designated as 'Empty'. The time is displayed

next to the title 'Empty'. You can use the REC MODE button to

Charly 1 01/01/03 0:28

change the recording mode (recording time).

How can I choose the titlel 'Empty' if there were many

Page1/1

recordings on the disc?

In this case press C and then select with B , A the title 'Empty'.

To select title press OK

Page1/1

To select title press OK

Charly 1 01/01/03 0:28

The DVD recorder rewinds to the beginning of that particular

displayed disc number. Please insert the appropriate disc.

part and automatically switches to Stop.

I see the message 'Insert disc number' on the screen.bThe blank space is located on the Disc Manager disc with the

5 Select the title 'Empty' with A or B .

6 Confirm with OK .

Disc Manager (DM)

Searching discs

You can easily search for the title of a recording stored in the Disc

Searching for a title in the Disc

Manager

Manager. To do this, the appropriate disc does not have to be in the

This function can be used to quickly and easily find and play back a

DVD recorder.

1 Press DISC MANAGER on the remote control.

recording saved in the Disc Manager.

1 Press DISC MANAGER on the remote control.

The screen will show the contents of the last Disc Manager

disc used.

3 Confirm with C .

2 Select 'Browse discs' using B or A .

Page1/1

To select title press OK

A list of the titles of all recordings stored in the Disc Manager

(DM) will appear on the TV screen.

Disc Manager

Charly 1 01/01/03 0:28

Find title Title Date Duration

2 Select 'Find title' using B or A and confirm with C .

4 Use A or B to select a different disc number if necessary and

What do the displays on the screen mean?

confirm with C .

'Title' = Title

What do the displays on the screen mean?

'Date' = Date of the recording

'Duration' = Length of the recording

'Title' = Title

'Date' = Date of the recording

'Duration' = Length of the recording

3 Select the title that you want to play back with B or A .

4 Confirm with OK .

5 Press A or B to select the desired title.

The DVD recorder will jump to the start of the selected

recording.

The DVD recorder searches for the start of the appropriate

6 Confirm with OK .

I see the message 'Insert disc number' on my screenbThe selected recording is located on the Disc Manager disc with the

recording.

I see the message 'Insert disc number' on my screenbThe selected recording is located on the Disc Manager disc with the

displayed disc number. Please insert the appropriate disc. After a

brief check, the DVD recorder will jump to the start of the selected

displayed disc number. Please insert the appropriate disc.

recording.

Page 22

EN 22 DVDR730/0x3.

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

The 'Digital Photo Manager'

editing.

Editing JPEG pictures

1 On the corresponding pictures press SELECT to select them for

Showing JPEG pictures from a roll

The picture frame appears in a different color.

If you want to deselect the pictures, press SELECT on the

The DVD recorder can read JPEG pictures stored on a CD-ROM,

Picture CD, memory card, or a DVD and write them on a

DVD+RW/+R or memory card.

selected pictures again.

Please observe the following:

displayed functions with the C or D button.

2 Keep pressing A until the menu bar is selected. Select one of the

-The file extension has to be '*.JPG' and not '*.JPEG'.

-These pictures must be stored in the root directories or in a

'Menu':leave the menuO'Play':Starts the slide showO'Erase':Erases the selected picturesO'Rotate':Rotates the selected pictures by 90O'Copy':Copies the selected pictures on the other loaded media

subfolder called 'DCIM' in folders. These will be recognized by

the DVD recorder as rolls (comparable with a 35mm roll for

cameras). You can select the directories (folders) as rolls in the

'Media menu'.

e.g. TIFF. It cannot play back moving pictures, Motion JPEG, and

other formats, or pictures in formats other than JPEG, or

-This device is compatible with still pictures (JPEG)

-It can only display DCF-standard still pictures or JPEG pictures

(from memory card to DVD+RW/+R or vice versa)

pictures associated with sound e.g. AVI-files.

'Select all':Selects all picturesO'Cancel':Cancels the changes

card).

1 Insert the medium you want to use (CD, DVD+RW/+R, memory

2 Press PHOTO on the remote control.

Using the buttons on the remote

The 'Media menu' will appear.

create this roll.

the pictures.

- Press PAUSE 9 . This will stop the automatic display of

- Press PLAY G to resume the slide show.OEnd the slide show

Press STOP h . The picture overview will appear.

B , A .

The data will be read and then an overview of the stored

pictures will be displayed.OYou can select a picture for viewing or editing with D , C ,

6 Select the desired roll using B or A and confirm with OK .

Fast browsing trough the pictures

You can also select a picture with the number buttons 0..9 on the

With O or N you can switch one page forward or backward.

remote.

The picture will be displayed as a full picture on the screen.

7 Press OK to select the desired picture.

Starting the slide show

You can display JPEG pictures in the selected roll automatically one

5 Select 'Roll' using B or A and confirm with C .

after the other at adjustable intervals.

You will see an overview with the first picture of each roll that

Press PLAY G to start the slide show.OInterrupting the slide show

contains pictures. The display and the description of the roll

will depend on the camera or the computer program used to

-'Play':Button PLAY G

-'Erase':Button CLEAR and then OK

-'Rotate':Button ANGLE

Slide show

If you did not insert the corresponding medium (disc or

memory card), a warning sign will appear above the symbol on

the left hand side of the screen.

memory card).

3 Use B or A to select the medium you want to process (disc or

4 Confirm with C .

The PC (PCMCIA) Card

In this DVD-Recorder you can use the following types of memory

General

The 'Digital Photo Manager'

cards with an adapter:

Using the 'Digital Photo Manager', you can view and modify JPEG

•) SD memory cards

pictures from a memory card, Picture CD, DVD, or a CD ROM. You

•) Multimedia Card

•) CompactFlash

can store them on a DVD+RW/+R or on the memory card.

In addition, you can store the pictures in a so-called album in a specific

•) SmartMedia

•) Memory Stick/Memory Stick pro

order, yet without changing the order in which the pictures are stored

on the memory card.

•) Micro Drive

•) xD Picture Card

Moreover, you can view the pictures in a slide show at adjustable

intervals.

Store the slide show on a DVD+RW/+R so you can view them on a

The DVD-Recorder can read/write files, which were stored on

memory cards using the file systems FAT 8, FAT 12, FAT16 and FAT

How many pictures can be organized from the DVD-Recorder?

DVD player.

32. This means that it can handle memory cards larger than 2 GB.

Since the storage size of a JPEG picture depends on different parameters

(quality, picture information, JPEG compression, resolution of the camera,...)

the limitation is only the available storage capacity.

first.

The label must be facing up.

The contacts must be facing the device.

until the EJECT button sticks out of the device front completely.

ID-number. With this number the allocation to the different disc is possible.

2 Insert the PC Card into the media slot in the front of the recorder

Select from the following chapters:

Press this button only if you want to remove the PC Card.

'The PC (PCMCIA) card',

to install or remove the memory card.

'Showing JPEG pictures from a roll' ,

Inserting the PC Card

1 If necessary, insert the memory card into the PC Card adapter

You can store up to a maximum of 999 photos in one album on a

DVD+RW/+R or memory card.

In case you want to store pictures on a medium that cannot be recorded by

the DVD recorder (Picture CD, CD-ROM, finalised DVD+R, DVD), you can

store up to a maximum of 100 pictures per album in 20 albums. These

albums will be stored in the internal memory with the appropriate disc

Removing the PC Card

in order to view and modify the pictures and create slide shows from

1 Press the EJECT button next to the PC Card.

the roll.

If the card remains in the slot, insert the PC Card once again and

2 This will push the card out of its slot.

'Advanced editing of JPEGpictures,

for advanced editing options such as color, sharpness...

press the EJECT button again.

'Creating an album ',

to arrange pictures from different rolls in a definite order and to create

Warning !

a slideshow from the album.

Insert/Remove the PC Card only when there is no access to the

memory card. This could damage the memory card.

'Making a 'DVD compatible' slide show',

Make a slide show from the roll/album for viewing on a DVD-player.

You can recognise the access by:

•) A moving disc symbol lights up on the top left corner of the screen

If you were not sure, press in the 'Digital Photo Manager' the button

'Storing rolls/albums on a DVD+RW/+R' ,

Store your JPEG pictures for archiving on a DVD+RW/+R.

'Changing roll settings' ,

PHOTO . This will take you directly into the 'Media menu' screen.

STANDBY m button.

You can also switch the DVD-Recorder off with the

to modify the rolls to your personal preferences.

'Changing album settings' ,

to modify the albums to your personal preferences.

'Changing the media settings',

to modify the storage media (DVD+RW/+R, memory cards) to your

personal preferences.

What is the difference between a 'Roll' and 'Albums'?

'Roll'

A folder containing JPEG pictures. It is comparable with a conventional

35mm film for cameras. Rolls will be created automatically from the

digital cameras.

'Albums'

A binary file containing references to the pictures on the rolls. It is

comparable with a conventional photo album that may contain the

pictures of different films (rolls).

You can delete an album without deleting the pictures of the rolls.

Page 23

ENGLISH

Directions For Use

EN 23DVDR730/0x 3.

The 'Digital Photo Manager'

Changing the picture order within an album

You can change the order of the pictures within an album as you wish.

The order of the pictures of the rolls remains unchanged.

Creating an album

confirm with C .

1 Select 'Albums'inthe'Media menu' using B or A and

You can store pictures contained in a memory card or DVD+RW/+R

in a so-called 'Albums' in a different order. Albums are binary files

containing information on the orientation and storage location of the

pictures.

An overview of the albums you already created will appear.

Albums from a medium that cannot be recorded by the DVD recorder

(Picture CD, CD-ROM, finalised DVD+R), will be stored in the internal

2 Press C to select the desired album. The 'Album Settings'

memory of the DVD recorder. You can store up to a maximum of 100

menu will appear.

pictures per album in 20 albums.

3 Select 'Overview' by pressing B . The 'Overview' option can be

found on the second menu page

Adding pictures to an album

different position.

2 An overview of the albums you already created will appear. Select

6 Press SELECT . The picture frame appears in a different color.

'New album' with B to create a new album.

7 Keep pressing A until the menu bar is highlighted.

3 Press C . The menu 'Album Settings' will appear.

4 Confirm with OK .

5 Use B , A , D , C to select the picture you want to move to a

confirm with C .

1 Select 'Albums'inthe'Media menu' using B or A and

8 Select 'Move' using D or C and confirm with OK .

In a new album, the line 'Add photos' is already highlighted.

4 Confirm with OK .

9 Use B , A , D , C to select the position before which the

desired picture is to be moved.

5 The roll overview will appear.

0 Confirm with OK . The picture will be inserted.

pictures to the album.

6 Use B or A to select the roll from which you want to add

7 Confirm with C .

The picture overview will appear.

until the album contains all the desired

album.

These pictures will be deselected.

Select all pictures

If you want to store many pictures in the album, select 'Select all'.

the album.

Then use SELECT to select the pictures you don't want to add to the

0 Keep pressing A until the menu bar is highlighted.

A Select 'Done' with D or C to add all selected pictures to the

album.

The album will be created. 'SAVING' will appear in the display while

the album is created.

Do not remove the medium from the device!

B Confirm with OK .

C The menu 'Album Settings' will then automatically appear.

pictures.

confirm with OK .

À To add additional pictures, use B to select 'Add photos' and

Á Repeat steps

the album.

attention to the order of the pictures. You can change it later in

8 Use D , C , B , A to select the pictures you want to add to

9 Confirm each selected picture with SELECT . Do not pay

'Zoom'

Using this function, you can enlarge the picture and pan through the

Changing the slide show settings

The 'Digital Photo Manager'

1 Press SYSTEM MENU during playback of the slide show.

enlarged picture.

2 Select one of the displayed functions with the D or C button.

1 Press OK to activate the zoom function.

'Overview'

Returns to the picture overview. Has the same function as

gives the picture an 'antique' appearance.

'Sepia:Displays the entire picture in brown colors. It

'Negative':

Converts the picture into a black-and-white negative.O'Colour negative':

Converts the picture into a color negative. Comparable to a

color negative film.O'Black & white':

Converts the picture into a black-and-white picture.O'Soften':

Use this function to reduce picture sharpness in three steps,

You can edit the pictures in the DVD recorder and then store them

back on the memory card or a DVD+RW/+R. The original picture

remains unchanged, and the modified one is additionally stored on the

from edge blurring to a visible blur.

medium.

Please make sure the memory card or DVD+RW/+R is not

write-protected and has enough storage space.

2 To end, keep pressing A until the menu bar is selected.

1 Press at the required picture the button EDIT .

'Colour'

2 Select one of the displayed functions with the D or C button.

Using this function, you can change the red, green, and blue color

Using the buttons on the remote

- ANGLE : Rotates the picture

components of the picture.

- ZOOM : Enlarge the picture

1 Press B .

- STOP h : Returns to the picture overview

2 Use B or A to select the corresponding color control.

- CLEAR : Discard the changes. The picture will be reloaded.

3 Change the color using D or C .

'Overview'

4 To end, keep pressing A until the menu bar is selected.

Returns to the picture overview.

'Reset'

This setting will appear only if changes have already been made to the

picture. If you want to discard the changes, confirm with OK .

'Save'

This setting will appear only if changes have already been made to the

picture. If you want to save the changes, confirm with OK .

'Rotate'

Rotates the picture by 90 each time you press OK .

'Flip'

Mirrors the picture along its vertical axis when you press OK .

'Filters'

Start the slide show with PLAY G .

Confirm with C .

Using this function, you can modify the picture properties.

1 Press B and select one of the displayed functions using B or

A . Confirm with C .

'Repeat':

Switches repeat playback of the slide show on and off

Using the buttons on the remote

- Repeat playback:Button PLAY MODE

- Enlarge pictures:Button ZOOM

- Edit pictures:Button EDIT

Advanced editing of the JPEG pictures

steps.

4 Press OK to return to the normal picture size.

3 You can press ZOOM to enlarge the selected area at several

2 Select the area to be enlarged with D , C , B , A .

STOP h

'Play'

Resumes the slide show. Has the same function as PLAY GO'Timer'

Select one of various speeds by pressing B

Page 24

EN 24 DVDR730/0x3.

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

The 'Digital Photo Manager'

Storing rolls/albums on a DVD+RW/+R

Making a slide show from a roll

Each roll will be stored as one video title on the DVD+RW/+R.

If you want to make a video title from different rolls, you have to

If you want to store the JPEG pictures from the rolls/albums on a

DVD+RW/+R, you must first prepare the disc.

create an album first. Then you can store the album as a video title on

the DVD+RW/+R.

appear.

Preparing a DVD+RW/+R

1 Press PHOTO on the remote control. The media menu will

2 Use B or A to select the disc alone as a medium. If you did not

the middle) and confirm with C .

1 In the 'Media menu' screen select the memory card (symbol in

3 Select with B , A , the roll from which you want to make a

2 Select the line 'Rolls' and confirm with C .

insert a disc, a warning sign will appear above the symbol on the

video title.

left hand side of the screen.

4 Press C the 'Roll Settings' menu will appear.

6 Confirm with OK .

If you want to continue, press OK .OTo cancel the process, press B or A .P'PREPARING' will appear in the display until the preparation is

WARNING!

All data on the disc will be erased.

What is the difference?

'Photo only'

The DVD+RW/+R will be prepared so that only pictures can be stored

on the entire disc (4,4 GB).

This video title will be recorded automatically after the last

recording. No existing titles will be overwritten.

Ensure that there is enough space on the disc.

'Video & photo'

only'or 'Video & photo' together on this disc.

Please note, that DVD+R's or memory cards can only be prepared

for 'Photo only'.

5 Use B or A to select whether you want to store 'Photo

4 Select 'Media settings' using B and confirm with OK .

3 Press C .

'SAVING' will appear in the display and the screen will show

the time left until completion.PThe new roll will be stored on the DVD+RW/+R as a video

title (movie). It will appear in the index picture screen as a

OK .

5 Select the line 'Make video title' using B , A an confirm with

separate title.

On the DVD+RW/+R a space (650 MB) will be reserved for storing

6 To end, press DISC MENU .

pictures additionally to movies. So you can store the appropriate photos

after the movie.

How long does this process last?

To prepare a disc for 'Video & photo', a new DVD+RW has to be

formattet first. This can take up to 25 minutes. You can speed up the

A DVD+R can not be prepared for 'Video & photo'

process, if you use a prerecorded disc.

If the disc has been successfully prepared, the 'Media

complete.

settings' menu will appear, indicating the available storage

space. (4.4 GB for 'Photo only'/650MB for 'Video & photo')

Making a 'DVD compatible' slide show

Editing pictures in an album

You can also erase, rotate, or hide pictures in an album. These changes

The 'Digital Photo Manager'

will only affect the album. The pictures on the disc or the memory card

Using this function, you can record the pictures in such a way, that you

can view the slide show from a roll or an album on a DVD player.

will remain unchanged.

The slide show will be stored on the DVD+RW/+R as a video title. If

you want to store the photos in the JPEG format in addition to the

video title, you must prepare the DVD+RW so that you can store both

using SELECT .

1 Select the pictures you want to change in the 'Album overview'

pictures and videos. See section 'Preparing a DVD+RW/+R'.

On a DVD+R you can only store either photos or videos. A

combination of JPEG photos and video is not possible.

2 Keep pressing A until the menu bar is highlighted.

3 Select one of the displayed functions with the D or C button.

'Menu':Closes the current menuO'Play':

Making a slide show from an album

1 Select the disc (top symbol) in the 'Media menu' and confirm

Starts the slide show of the albumO'Move':

'SAVING' will appear in the display and the screen will show

the time left until completion.

The new album will be stored on the DVD+RW/+R as a video

title (movie). It will appear in the index picture screen as a

separate title.

This video title will be recorded automatically after the last

recording. No existing titles will be overwritten.

Using of the buttons on the remote

-'Play':

Ensure that there is enough space on the disc.

Button PLAY MODE

-'Erase':

6 To end, press DISC MENU .

Button CLEAR

-'Rotate':

Button ANGLE

picture of the album, until the album corresponds to your personal

preferences.

Rotates pictures by 90O'Hide':

4 Select 'Make video title' in the menu 'Album Settings' using

B , A .

Hides pictures for the slide showO'Select all':

5 Confirm with OK .

Selects all picturesO'Cancel':

Discards all changes

to the album'.

2 Add pictures to the album as described in chapter 'Adding pictures

Changes the order of pictures within an album.O'Erase':

pictures, enter a new name for an album, or change the cover

3 You can change the order of the pictures, erase unwanted

Erases the pictures from an album. The picture on the media

remains unchanged.O'Rotate:

with C .

Page 25

Manual recording

Recording with automatic switchoff

(OTR onetouchrecording)

With this function you can start a recording manually but end

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

EN 25DVDR730/0x 3.

the recording time..

Each time you press REC/OTR n you will add 30 minutes to

How can I cancel the recording time I have just entered?

To delete an entry, press CLEAR while the display shows the

recording time.

How can I check the remaining recording time?

Press SYSTEM MENU while an OTR is in progress. The time at

which the recording will end will appear on the TV screen in the timer

switch to the internal tuner in the DVD recorder.

number (channel name) you want to record.

automatically within a certain time. Thus avoid recordings till the end of

the disc.

1 Insert a disc.

2 If necessary, use the MONITOR button on the remote control to

3 Use CHANNEL q or CHANNEL r to select the programme

4 Press REC/OTR n on the remote control.

info box.

Insert chapter markers

During recording you can mark scenes so you can find them or hide

A dialog box appears asking you whether you want to

delete the contents or eject the discbThe disc inserted is a DVD+RW but its contents are not DVD

them later.

During recording, press EDIT at the start point. 'Inserting marker'

video-compatible (e.g. a data disc). Recordings on this disc can only

appears on the TV screen. In the display, the number of the 'CHAPTER'

increases by one.

REC/OTR n button.

be made if the entire disc is first deleted with the

For further information on titles and chapters, see the section on

The message 'Title limit' appears on the screen if a

'Changing to another title/chapter' in 'Playback'.

recording is to be madebA disc may contain a maximum of 48 titles (including blank titles).

6 Use the STOP h button on the remote control or h on the

Delete titles or change the disc.

'MENU UPDT' will appear on the display.

machine to stop the recording.

The DVD recorder is writing the list of contents. Wait until

3 If necessary, use the MONITOR button on the remote control to

the message disappears from the display. The recording is then

complete.PThe display will read 'DISC ERR'

switch to the internal tuner in the DVD recorder.

4 Use CHANNEL q or CHANNEL r to select the programme

Recording could not be completed correctly because of a disc

This will appear on the display:

number (station name) you want to record.

error. Check the disc and clean it if necessary.

Making recordings on DVD+R discs compatible

If you want to play back the recording on a DVD player, you need to

finalise the disc in the DVD recorder. You can prepare your DVD for

FREETITLE P01

use in a DVD player using the 'Finalising' feature. See 'Finalising

DVD+R discs' in 'Managing the disc contents'.

Interrupt recording (Pause)

Programme numbers of the external inputs:

'EXT1'

Scart socket at the back EXT1 TO TV-I/O

With this function you can interrupt and continue recordings without

'EXT2'

creating a new title

1 During recording press PAUSE 9 , for example to avoid

Scart socket at the back EXT2 AUX-I/O

'CAM1'

recording the commercials.

2 To continue recording, press REC/OTR n .

Front SVHS/audio sockets S-VIDEO (CAM1) / AUDIO L/R

(CAM1)

'CAM1'

Front video/audio sockets A/V S-VIDEO (CAM1) / AUDIO L/R

End recording

(CAM1)

Switching between the S-VIDEO (CAM1) and VIDEO

To end the recording, press the STOP h button. Wait until 'MENU

UPDT' disappears from the display.

(CAM1) sockets takes place automatically. If a signal is available at

both sockets at the same time, the signal at the S-VIDEO

(CAM1) socket has priority.

'CAM2'

Digital Video (i Link) front socket DV IN (CAM2)

5 To start recording, press REC/OTR n on the remote control or

If you want to start the recording at the end of the existing

RECORD on the DVD recorder.

C01 1:16:51 P01

message 'SAFE REC' appears on the display.

For DVD+R discs each new recording is always added at the

end of all previous recordings as existing recordings cannot be

overwritten.

recordings, hold down the REC/OTR n button until the

This will, for example, appear in the display:

General

Manual recording

With this DVD recorder, you can record on two types of DVD:

DVD+RW (Digital Versatile Disc + wiederbeschreibbar)

This disc can be written to and then the contents deleted.

DVD+R (Digital Versatile Disc + einmalbeschreibbar)

This type of disc can only be recorded once.

If you want to play this DVD in a DVD player it must be

finalised using the 'Finalise disc' function. It is not

possible to make further recordings using this disc.

If this disc is to be played in a DVD recorder it must not

be finalised. Recordings can be added and deleted. The

disc space (playback time) from the deleted recording

cannot be recovered for further recordings

This disc is then checked for content and system.

- To add a new recording at the end of the last recording on the

'SAFE REC' appears on the display.

disc, hold down the REC/OTR n button until the message

- For DVD+R discs each new recording is always added at the end

of all previous recordings as existing recordings cannot be

overwritten.

stop and the Recorder will turn itself off automatically.

- If the end of a disc is reached during recording, recording will

Recording without automatic

switchoff

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

READING' will appear on the display.

1 Insert a disc on which the recording is to be made.

überschrieben werden soll, oder 'Empty title'.

2 Wählen Sie mit der Taste B oder A jenen Titel der

Sollte eine neue DVD+RW/+R eingelegt sein, erscheint im

Anzeigefeld 'EMPTYDISC'. Da noch keine Indexbild-Anzeige

verfügbar ist, können Sie sofort mit der Aufnahme beginnen.OSollten Sie Aufnahmen zwischen bereits vorhandenen

Aufnahmen einfügen, beachten Sie die Länge der alten und der

neuen Aufnahme. Sollte die neue Aufnahme zu lang sein, wird

die nachfolgende Aufnahme (Titel/Kapitel) überschrieben.

Page 26

EN 26 DVDR730/0x3.

Manual recording

Automatic recording from a satellite

receiver (Sat recording)

You can use this function if your own a satellite receiver that can

control other devices via a scart cable and a programming function

(timer). For more information, please see the operating instructions for

the satellite receiver.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number

for the DVD recorder.

The menu bar appears.

2 Press SYSTEM MENU on the remote control.

ENGLISH

' symbol with D or C .

3 Select '

Directions For Use

Switching off 'Sat Recording'

To switch off the function, select 'Off' using C or D .

5 Select 'EXT2' in line 'Sat record' with D or C .

4 Select 'Record settings' using B or A and confirm with C .

6 Confirm with OK .

7 Use a scart cable to connect scart socket EXT2 AUX-I/O on the

DVD recorder to the corresponding scart socket on the satellite

receiver.

8 To end, press SYSTEM MENU .

9 Insert a disc you want to use for recording.

0 Programme the satellite receiver with the required information

(programme number of the TV channel, start time, finish time).

If necessary, please see the operating instructions for your satellite

receiver.

A Switch off the DVD recorder using STANDBY m .

'SAT' also appears in the display to indicate that the function

is active.

The start and end of the recording is controlled via scart cable

The DVD recorder is now ready to record.

EXT2 AUX-I/O .

Selecting the recording mode (picture

quality)

Lining up recordings within a title

(assemble cut)

You can select the picture quality of the recording using the recording

quality feature and hence the maximum recording time per disc.

On a recorded DVD+RW disc you can add another recording to an

existing title. This recording is added to the title as a 'chapter'. The

To check the quality of a recording mode you can make a 'test

existing information will be overwritten starting from this point. Titles

recording' with the desired recording mode. Check during playback the

quality of this 'test recording'.

will also be overwritten that follow the current title depending on the

length of the new recording. The recording type (Quality) will be taken

During playback, the correct picture quality will automatically be

from the current title.

selected.

C button to select the 'C' (Chapter) symbol. You can also use the

To play back this recording, press SYSTEM MENU and use the

remote control before you start the recording.

1 Select the record mode with the button REC MODE on the

T/C key.

Please observe, that you can not switch the recording type

For further information, see 'Changing to another title/chapter' in

STOP h button.

during recording. You have to interrupt the recording with the

What happens with DVD+R discs?

'Playback'.

'M1': High Quality offers the best picture quality and a

recording time of 1 hour.O'M2': Standard Play (pre-recorded DVD quality) offers

New recordings on 'DVD+R' discs can only be added after existing

recordings. It is not possible to overwrite existing recordings on 'DVD+R'

discs.

standard picture quality and a recording time of 2 hours.O'M2x': Standard Play plus (better than S-VHS quality) offers

be added.

1 In the index display, find the title to which the new recording is to

standard picture quality and a recording time of 2.5 hours.O'M3': Long Play (S-VHS picture quality).O'M4': Extended Play (better than VHS picture quality).

2 Look at the last minute of the old recording (playback)

3 Press PAUSE 9 on the remote control at the position where

Recording time of 4 hours.O'M6': Super Long Play (VHS picture quality).

'9' will appear on the screen.OTo monitor the recording you can press MONITOR to

the new recording is to go.

Recording time of 6 hours.O'M8': Super Extended Play (VHS-LP picture quality).

switch to the internal tuner.

4 Now start recording as usual by pressing REC/OTR n on the

Recording time of 8 hours.

remote control.

You can also set a record mode as a basic setting

The new recording will be added.

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button.

5 Stop recording with STOP h .

' symbol with D or C .

C .

4 In the line 'Record mode' select the recording type with D or

3 Select 'Record settings' using B or A and confirm with C .

2 Select '

you can select the 'Stndrd' (Standard) or 'Sport' setting (for rapid

movements) in the 'Filter mode' line.

5 Confirm using OK and SYSTEM MENU .

6 If you have selected the recording mode 'M3', 'M4', 'M6'or'M8',

Preventing accidental erasing of discs

Manual recording

To ensure you don't accidentally delete a recording you can protect

the entire disc. You can only ever protect the entire disc. You cannot

protect individual recordings.

What happens with DVD+R discs?

As long as these discs are not finalised, they can be protected against

accidental erasure in the same way as DVD+RW discs.

1 Insert the disc to be protected.

2 While the index screen is displayed press STOP h on the

The first title is highlighted.

remote control.

3 Press A .

This takes you to the disc info screen.

Select the 'Protection' line.

4 Press the C button.

The entire disc is now protected.

If an attempt is made to record on a protected disc, 'DISC

LOCK' will appear on the display and 'Disc locked' will appear

on the screen.

If you later decide to record on the disc, follow these steps but select

'Unprotected' at step

5 Select 'Protected' with the B button and confirm with OK .

6 Press D and then DISC MENU to terminate.

Confirm with C .

Page 27

ENGLISH

Directions For Use

Press EDIT to exit

Favorite Scene Selection

Insert marker PressOK

Delete marker

Delete all markers

Current chapter visible

EN 27DVDR730/0x 3.

Managing the disc contents

Favorite Scene Selection

General

In this menu you can adapt a title to suit your particular needs.

The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV

screen.

appropriate point.

You can insert/delete chapter markers, hide chapters, select a new

index, or split up a title. Press EDIT on the remote control during

recording to open this menu.

Insert chapter markers

During recording, you can set or delete chapter markers within a title.

The maximum number of chapters per disc is 255 and 99 per title. If

one of these limits is reached the following message will appear on the

screen: 'Chapter limit'. You need to delete some markers before you

Charly 1

00:29:59 • M1

Fri15/02/2004

Empty title

01:30:01

can insert new ones or make recordings.

1 During playback, press EDIT on the remote control at the

When a recording is made to disc, the following additional information

is also stored at the beginning of the recording:

•) Name of the recording

If the TV station does not transmit a name, only the channel number

and time will be stored as the name

•) Length of the recording

•) Record type (Quality)

•) Date of the recording

•) Index picture of the recording

A marker will be set every 5-6 minutes if the 'Auto chapters' function

is activated in the 'Record settings' menu. This marker is known as a

'chapter'.

These markers can be changed when the recording has finished.

Can markers be set on a DVD+R disc?

Markers can be set on these discs if they have not been finalised.

It is also possible to add 'chapters' later. This means that scenes you do

2 Confirm 'Insert marker' by pressing OK .

not want to see during playback can be hidden or skipped. During

'Inserting marker' appears on the TV screen.

playback you can watch your recording as a continuous sequence

without the hidden chapters.

'X' will appear on the screen:

This DVD is write-protected or the disc is a finalised DVD-R. Subsequent

changes cannot be made.

3 To stop this function, press EDIT .

Recording from a video recorder/DVD

player

Direct Record

Manual recording

Can you record the right TV channel in seconds when the DVD

Please observe:

Most pre-recorded video cassettes or DVDs are copy-protected. If you

recorder is switched off? No problem. If recording is started manually,

the switchedoff DVD recorder takes the current TV channel from

try to copy these, the message 'COPY PROT' will appear in the display

the TV set via the scart cable.

of the DVD recorder.

You will find more information on how to switch 'Direct record' on or

off in the next section 'Direct record'.

Programmnummer für den DVD-Recorder.

1 Schalten Sie das Fernsehgerät. Wählen Sie falls erforderlich die

2 Switch on the DVD recorder.

How does Direct Record work?

The DVD recorder compares the TV channel selected on the TV set with its

stored TV channels via the scart cable. If the same TV channel is found, it

3 Insert a DVD+RW/+R ready for recording.45 Locate on the DVD+RW/+R the position where you want to start

switches the DVD recorder to the corresponding programme number and

starts recording.

Please do not change channel on the TV during the search. This could affect

the recording.

the tuning of the DVD recorder.

1 On the TV set, select the programme number you want make the

6 If necessary press STOP h to stop playback.

recording from.

STOP h or PAUSE 9 .

to which the Video recorder/DVD player is connected. ('EXT1'

for EXT1 TO TV-I/O ,'EXT2'for EXT2 AUX-I/O )

'NOTV' appears in the display

This TV channel could not be found in the DVD recorder's

In case playback has started automatically, interrupt it with

0 Switch on the video recorder/DVD player.

memory.

Check that all TV channels saved on the TV set are available

on the DVD recorder. If required, save any missing channels.

Please read 'Manual TV channel search' in 'Installing your DVD

recorder/DVD player on the screen.

8 Press MONITOR to display the picture of the Video

7 Select recording mode picture quality) using REC MODE .

9 Use B , A to select the programme number of the input socket

The display will read 'WAIT'

The DVD recorder is comparing its saved TV channels with

those of the TV set. Please do not change the TV channel on

the TV set while 'WAIT' is shown in the display.

2 Press REC/OTR n with the DVD recorder switched off.

and playback by pressing PLAY G on the video recorder/DVD

player.

A Start recording by pressing REC/OTR n on the DVD recorder

recorder'.

Check the connectors at both ends of the scart cable.

Check your TV's operating instructions to see which scart

socket is used for video signals.

When copying video cassettes, 'NO SIGNAL' appears in the

display of the DVD recorderbCheck whether the cable connectors are properly inserted.bIf the recording is made from a video recorder, change the 'tracking'

If the problem persists, you won't be able to use this feature.

setting on the video recorder.bIn case of bad or non-standard video input signals, the DVD recorder

3 Stop recording with STOP h .

may be unable to detect the signal.aWhen copying DVD video discs or pre-recorded video

Switching 'Direct Record' on or off

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number

cassettes, the picture is fuzzy and brightness variesbThis happens when you try to copy DVDs or video cassettes that are

for the DVD recorder.

copy-protected. Although the complete cassette/disc is recorded, only

2 Press SYSTEM MENU on the remote control. The menu bar

parts without copy protected signal can be played back. This

interference is unavoidable with copy-protected DVDs or video

appears.

cassettes.

' symbol with D or C .

3 Select '

C .

7 Confirm with OK .

6 Select 'On' (Direct Record on) or 'Off' (Direct Record off) using

5 Select 'Direct Record' using B or A .

4 Select 'Record settings' using B or A and confirm with C .

8 To end, press SYSTEM MENU .

Page 28

EN 28 DVDR730/0x3.

ENGLISH

Directions For Use

Press EDIT to exit

Favorite Scene Selection

New index picture Press OK

New background

Divide title

Managing the disc contents

Changing the menu background

You can choose any frame from the recording as the menu

You will be prompted to press OK again to make sure you

really want to delete all markers.OIf you do not want to, press the D button.

3 Confirm with OK .

background. This setting is stored on the inserted DVD. Please note

that after the modification the 'original background' will be lost.

If you erase the complete disc (close the disc tray with CLEAR and

make a recording) the 'original background' will be restored.

4 To end the menu , press EDIT .

new menu background. Press PAUSE 9 .

1 During playback, search for the location that is to be used as the

Changing the index picture

2 Press EDIT .

Normally the picture from the beginning of a recording is used as the

The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV

screen.

index picture. You can however choose any picture from the recording

as the index picture.

Press the PAUSE 9 button.

1 During playback, search for location of the new index picture.

The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV

2 Press the EDIT button.

screen.

'Updating menu' appears on the TV screen.POnce the revision has been completed successfully the DVD

recorder reverts to the index overview.

4 Start the change with OK .

3 Select line 'New background' and confirm with OK .

Press EDIT to exit

Favorite Scene Selection

New index picture Press OK

New background

Divide title

'Updating menu' appears on the TV screen.

3 Select line 'New index picture' and confirm with OK .

4 Start the change with OK .

Once the revision has been completed successfully the DVD recorder

reverts to the index overview.

with C .

Favorite Scene Selection

Press EDIT to exit

7 Press T/C twice to change the chapter number 'C'.

8 Select the previous chapter with B , since you are already in the

Hiding chapters

Managing the disc contents

Initially, all the chapters are visible. You can hide chapters for playback

next chapter (end of the chapter is also the beginning of the next

(e.g. unwanted scenes) or make them visible again. In editing mode,

chapter).

hidden chapters are shown darker.

A chapter always consists of a start marker and an end marker.

stop playback.

9 Wait until the chapter has been played and press PAUSE 9 to

To hide a certain scene, proceed as follows:

0 Select 'Current chapter' using B or A .

1 Search the beginning of the scene you want to hide. Press

Insert marker PressOK

Delete marker

Delete all markers

Current chapter visible

The picture is shown darker.

A Using C select 'hidden'.

PAUSE 9 .

Switching quickly

You can switch between show chapters ('visible') and hide chapters

Favorite Scene Selection

This function is independent from the selected line.

('hidden') quickly and easily using SELECT .

B To end, press EDIT .

During playback this chapter will be skipped.

If the chapter is not visible, select 'visible' in step

Deleting chapter markers

Within a title you can delete either all markers or individual markers.

Press EDIT to exit

Insert marker PressOK

Delete marker

Delete all markers

Current chapter visible

the scene.

Make sure that you do not jump into the next title (title

Selection' editing menu.

2 Press EDIT on the remote control to call the 'Favorite Scene

The number of chapters ('C') in the menu line will increase by

one.

3 Set the start marker using OK .

4 Search for the end of the scene.

number 'T' must not change).

You can also use O or N to search faster for the end of

Only chapters within a title can be hidden.

5 Press PAUSE 9 at the corresponding position.

6 Set the end marker with OK . This will also be the start marker of

control.

1 While the relevant chapter is playing, press EDIT on the remote

the next chapter.

The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV

screen.

How can I select different chapters?

- Press the T/C button on the remote control. Titles and chapters are

displayed at the top of the screen.

- Select title (T) or chapter (C) with C or D .

-Use A or B to select the title/chapter channel you want to edit.

line Delete marker' for this chapterOline 'Delete all markers' for all chapters within the selected

title.

2 Use B to select:

The number of chapters ('C') in the menu line increases by

one.

The number of chapters ('C') has increased by two or more

numbersbThis is the case when you want to hide a chapter that, due to

automatic chapter numbering (if switched on), stretches over two or

more chapters. In this case, you must delete the start of the

automatically generated chapter:

PAUSE 9 .

marker. Confirm with OK . The current chapter number decreases by

- Press T/C twice while the editing menu is displayed to change the

chapter number.

one.

- Select the chapter between the new markers using B or A . Press

- Select 'Delete marker' with B to delete the current chapter

Page 29

ENGLISH

Settings for title Charly1

Name Charly1

Play full title

Directions For Use

EN 29DVDR730/0x 3.

Erase this title Press OK

Managing the disc contents

Erasing recordings/titles

Playing the entire title

You can erase specific recordings from a disc. To do this, proceed as

If you have hidden certain sections (chapters) of a title, this setting lets

follows:

you watch the entire title including the hidden sections. To do this,

proceed as follows:

1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC

MENU .

1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC

MENU .

with C .

2 Using A or B select the title you want to delete and confirm

The title editing menu will appear.

Settings for title Charly1

Name Charly1

'This will completely erase this title'. 'Press OK to

If you want to delete this title, press OK to confirm.OOtherwise press D .

confirm' appears on the TV screen.

3 Select 'Erase this title' using A or B and confirm with OK .

Play full title Press OK

Erase this title

The title editing menu will appear.

Playback starts automatically. The title is played in its entirety -

with C .

2 Using A or B select the title you want to play all of and confirm

including the hidden chapters.

3 Select 'Play full title' using A or B and confirm with OK .

4 'Erasing title' appears on the TV screen.

new recording can now be made here.

If the deleted title was very short (less than 1 minute) 'Empty

title' will not appear at this point.

5 At this point 'Empty title' appears in the 'index picture display'. A

Can titles be deleted from a DVD+R disc?

'deleted' title is skipped. The space used for this title cannot be used

again as the title has not been physically deleted. Once the disc has

been finalised no further changes can be made.

Titles on DVD+R discs are only marked as deleted. 'Deleted title' will

appear in the display instead of 'Empty title'. During playback the

Editing recording titles (name)

Dividing titles

Managing the disc contents

You can divide a title into several sections (titles) of any size. Each of

Some TV stations transmit the title (name) of a programme. In this

these sections (titles) is identified by its own index.

case, the name will be included automatically (e.g. 'ROCKY').

Otherwise, the only the programme number (programme name) and

Note: This division cannot be undone.

the time are stored as the name of the recording. The name of the

recording can only be changed after the recording has been completed.

Can I divide titles on DVD+R discs?

As recordings on DVD+R discs cannot be overwritten, it is not possible

1 If required, press the STOP h button to interrupt playback.

to divide titles on DVD+R discs.

2 Using A or B select the title whose name you want to edit and

control.

1 While the relevant title is playing, press EDIT on the remote

confirm with C .

The menu for editing names appears.

The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV

screen.

Settings for title Charly1

Name Charly1

Play full title

Favorite Scene Selection

Erase this title

New index picture Press OK

New background

Divide title

SELECT .

You can switch between upper and lowercase using

You can delete the character using CLEAR .

is to be changed/re-entered.

4 Using C or D select the position where the letter/number/icon

3 Select 'Name' using A or B and confirm with C .

Press EDIT to exit

5 Change the icon using A or B .

'Dividing title' appears on the TV screen.

2 Select 'Divide title' and confirm with the OK button.

3 If you are sure, press OK to start the process.

4 Wait until the new title is displayed with an index picture in the

index picture overview.

How can I enter the characters with the buttons 0..9 ?

The process of splitting the title is now complete.

For special characters press the button 1 repeatedly.

Press a number button as often as the required character or the

number appears. You can enter language dependent characters with

the buttons N or O on the corresponding character e.g.: ä,

button 2 for 'a' and then with O as often as 'ä' appears.

The position for the following character will be selected automatically.

To enter a space press the button 1 .

To erase a character press CLEAR .

until you have made the changes you want.

and

6 Repeat

'Storing name' appears on the TV screen for confirmation.

7 Save the new name with OK .

8 To end, press D .

Page 30

EN 30 DVDR730/0x3.

Managing the disc contents

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

Finalising DVD+R discs

This feature is required to play back a DVD+R disc in a DVD player.

Changing the disc name

1 In the 'Disc info display' press C .

Once the disc has been finalised no further recordings or changes can

The 'Settings for' menu appears on the TV screen.

be made.

1 In the 'Disc info display' press C .

The 'Settings for' menu appears on the TV screen.

Settings for Philips1

Disc name Philips1

2 Select 'Finalise disc' using A or B and confirm with OK .

Protection Unprotected

Erase disc

'Finalise disc' does not appearbEither there is no DVD+R disc inserted or the disc is already finalised.

To end, press SYSTEM MENU .aThe 'Settings for' menu does not appearbThe menu may not appear if the disc has been recorded on another

' menu, under 'Features'.

DVD recorder. In this case, use the 'Finalise disc' feature in the

2 Select 'Disc name' using A or B and confirm with C .

'Working...' appears on the TV screen.PA bar will move from left to right indicating progress.

process will take.

4 To confirm press OK .

3 The screen displays 'This will take...' to show how long the

is to be changed/re-entered.

3 Using C or D select the position where the letter/number/icon

4 Change the icon using A or B .

You can switch between upper and lowercase using

Settings for Philips1

Disc name Philips1

Protection Unprotected

Erase disc Press OK

The 'Settings for' menu appears on the TV screen.

Erasing DVD+RW Disc's

1 In the 'Disc info display' press C .

until you have made the changes you want.

and

SELECT .

You can delete the character using CLEAR .

5 Repeat

'Storing name' appears on the TV screen for confirmation.

6 Save the new title with OK .

7 To end, press D .

Finishing editing

If one or more titles have been edited a DVD player may still display

the original titles. You can prepare your DVD+RW disc in such a way

that a DVD player will be able to play the edited version.

1 In the 'Disc info display' press C .

The 'Settings for' menu appears on the TV screen.

2 Select 'Erase disc' using A or B and confirm with OK .

2 Select 'Make edits compatible' using A or B and confirm

'This will erase all titles Press OK to confirm' appears

with OK .

on the TV screen..

Otherwise press D .

3 If you want to delete all the titles, press OK to confirm.

'Make edits compatible' does not appearbYour disc is already compatible. There is no need for conversion.

To end, press SYSTEM MENU .

'Erasing disc' appears on the TV screen.

After deletion, the index picture display shows the free space

3 The screen displays 'This will take' to show how long the

process will last.

on the disc.

If the disc is empty already, you cannot select 'Erase disc'.

'Working...' appears on the TV screen.Pbar will move from left to right indicating progress.

4 To confirm press OK .

Disc settings

Managing the disc contents

Philips1

00:35:59 used

Fri15/02/2004

PAL

DVD playback

This screen appears before the first title and contains general

information about the current disc.

You can:

•) change the name of the disc

•) activate or deactivate write protection on the disc

•) Finish editing (make the disc DVD compatible)

•) finalise a DVD+R

•) delete a DVD+RW

To get to this display, proceed as follows:

1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC

The disc info display will appear.

MENU .

2 Select the first title with A or press STOP h . STOP h .

3 Press A .

Page 31

ENGLISH

System

Directions For Use

Rec

Mode

VPS

Timer programming

Timer

PDC End

Start

Prog.

Date

21:30

20:15

BBC1

To store

Press OK

Mo-Fr/Weekly

Press SELECT

EN 31DVDR730/0x 3.

programming information is stored in a TIMER block.

6 If all information is correct, press the OK button. The

Programming a recording (TIMER)

The following message appears on the screen: 'Please

enter programme number'bThe programme number of the TV channel has not yet been

7 To end, press TIMER s .

buttons 0..9 on the remote control to select the appropriate

assigned to the ShowView number. Use C , D or the number

The inserted disk is checked.

8 Insert a recordable disc (one without write protection).

OK .

programme number (name) of the TV channel and confirm with

The following message appears on the screen: 'ShowView

9 Search the position on the disc where the recording should begin.

Press STOP h .

number wrong'bThe entered ShowView number is incorrect. Repeat the entry or

The programmed recording functions only if the DVD recorder

0 Switch off the DVD recorder using STANDBY m .

cancel using the SYSTEM MENU button.bCheck the time/date (see 'Setting the time & date' in 'Installing your

has been switched off using STANDBY m .

If one or more recordings have been programmed 'TIMER' will light up

on the display.

DVD recorder').aThe following message appears on the screen: 'Weekend

programming not possible'bA daily recording was entered for the wrong day. Daily programming

Programming recordings without the

can only be used for recordings to be made from Monday to Friday.

ShowView

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

Rec

Mode

21:30

VPS

PDC End

Start

20:15

Prog.

BBC1

Date

ShowView system

Timer

The programming method selected last is marked.

1 Press TIMER s on the remote control.

To store

Press OK

Mo-Fr/Weekly

Press SELECT

The decoded data appears after confirmation. You can go back

and change the data. Select the appropriate input field with

The information will appear on the screen.

with the C button.

2 Select line 'Timer programming' with B or A . and confirm

C or D . If required, make changes using A , B or the

number buttons 0..9 .

'Switching on 'VPS/PDC' in the 'Start' input field

'VPS/PDC' ('*' lights up). If you press SELECT again, you will switch

'VPS/PDC' off ('*' goes out).

Changing the recording mode in input field 'End'

Select the 'End' input field using C .

To store

Use REC MODE to select the recording mode 'M1, M2, M2x, M3,

M4, M6, M8'.

Press OK

Select the 'Start' input field using C . Using SELECT switch on

3 Select the input field with D or C .

Fit to space Recording

You can select also the recording mode 'FR'.

With these setting the recording mode (bit rate) will be automatically

4 Enter information with B or A or with the number buttons

calculated to use the complete empty space (title 'Empty').

If the empty space is too small the recording will be stopped to prevent

0..9 .

the following titles from being overwritten.

Do not use this function under the following conditions:

•) more then one programmed recording

•) daily/weekly repeated recordings

•) recordings with VPS/PDC

May be the calculation of the recording mode can not function properly.

System

Programming recordings with the

ShowView

General

Programming a recording (TIMER)

Use 'Programming a recording (TIMER)', to automatically start and stop

a recording at a later date.

The DVD recorder will switch to the right programme number and

Thanks to this programming system, you no longer need to tediously

begin recording at the correct time.

With this DVD recorder, you can pre-programme up to six recordings

enter the date, programme number, start and finish times. All the

information needed by the DVD recorder for programming is

within a period of one month.

programming number. This 9-digit

number is found in most TV listings magazine.

ShowView

contained in the ShowView

To make a programmed recording, your DVD recorder needs to

know:

* the date you want to make the recording

for the DVD recorder.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number

* the programme number of the TV channel

2 Press TIMER s on the remote control.

* the start and stop time of the recording

* VPS or PDC on or off

The programming method selected last is marked.

* the recording mode (picture quality) ('M1/M2/M2x/M3/M4/M6/M8')

C .

3 Select 'ShowView system' using B or A and confirm with

Fit to space Recording

You can select also the recording mode 'FR'.

With these setting the recording mode (bit rate) will be automatically

calculated to use the complete empty space (title 'Empty').

4 Enter the entire ShowView number. This number is up to 9 digits

If the empty space is too small the recording will be stopped to prevent

long and can be found next to the start time of the TV programme

in your TV listings magazine.

e.g.: 5-312-4 or 5,312 4

the following titles from being overwritten.

This information is saved in a 'TIMER block'.

ShowView system

Timer

CLEAR .

Enter 53124 for the ShowView-number.

If you make a mistake, you can clear your instructions with

What is 'VPS/PDC'?

- 'VPS' (Video Programming System)/'PDC' (Programme Delivery Control)

Before you begin, make sure the clock is set. If the clock is not set, the

'Time/Date' menu will appear when you press the TIMER s button.

are used to control the start and duration of TV channel recordings. If

a TV programme starts earlier or ends later than was scheduled, the

ShowView number

DVD recorder will then turn on and off at the correct time.

---------

What do I need to know about 'VPS/PDC'?

- Usually the start time is the same as the VPS or PDC time. If a

Mo-Fr/Weekly

different 'VPS/PDC time' is indicated, e.g.: '20.15 (VPS/PDC 20.14)',

the VPS/PDC time '20.14' must be entered exactly to the minute

Press SELECT

during programming.

If you want to programme a time that is different from the VPS or PDC

time, you must switch off VPS or PDC.

Selecting daily/weekly recordings

Using SELECT , select from the following options:

'Mo-Fr': Repeated daily recordings (Monday to Friday).

'VPS/PDC' at a time. If you want to record two or more TV

programmes on a TV channel using 'VPS/PDC', you will need to

- Only one TV program of a TV channel can be controlled using

'Weekly': Repeated weekly recordings (every week on the same day).

programme these as two separate recordings.

- Since the DVD recorder requires a certain lead time (for getting the

5 Confirm with OK .

disc up to speed and positioning the laser) before recording can start, it

is possible that the recorder will miss the first few seconds of a TV

show recorded with VPS/PDC.

In this case, disable VPS/PDC and enter a start time one minute

earlier.

Page 32

EN 32 DVDR730/0x3.

Programming a recording (TIMER)

While a programmed recording is being made, you cannot operate your DVD recorder manually. If you want

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

to cancel the programmed recording, press STANDBY m .

The DVD recorder was switched on a few minutes before the start of a programmed recording.

Switch off the DVD recorder using STANDBY m . A programmed recording (timer) will only function if the

DVD recorder is switched off ( STANDBY m button).

Either a disc has not been inserted or the disc cannot be used for recording. Insert a disc on which recordings

can be made.

Search the position on the disc where you want the recording to begin.

Switch off the DVD recorder using STANDBY m .

A write-protected disc has been inserted. Undo the write protection (see 'Preventing accidental erasing of

discs' in 'Manual recording') or insert a different disc.

If this error message appears after pressing TIMER s , then all TIMER blocks are already programmed.

No more recordings can be programmed. Press the C button. If you want to clear or check a programmed

recording (TIMER block), select it with A or B .

The data for the recording could not be transferred. Please check date, start time and finish time of the

programmed recording.

Two programmed recordings overlap.bIf you ignore this error message the show with the earlier start time will be recorded first. The start of the

second show will not be recorded.bChange the setting for either of the two recordings.bClear either of the two recordings

Problem solving for programmed

recordings

How to change or delete a

programmed recording (TIMER)

PROBLEM SOLUTION

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

The DVD recorder is

not responding

'Switch off, timer

The programming mode selected last is marked.

1 Press TIMER s on the remote control.

recording' flashes on

2 Select 'Timer List' using B or A and confirm with C .

the TV screen.

Timer List

Timer

Error message: 'Insert

recordable disc'

Rec

ModeM2--

End

21:30

VPS

PDC

Start

20:15

Prog.

BBC1

Date01--

--:--

-----

The error message

'Disc locked' appears

briefly on the screen.

To exit

Total record time: 01:15

To change

Error message:

Press TIMER

Press ›

'Memory full'

3 Select the programmed recording (TIMER) you want to check,

change or delete with B or A .

The 'Data error'

message appears on

Delete programmed recording

4 Press the CLEAR button.

the screen.

screen.

'-- ---' appears rather than the displayed values

5 Confirm with OK .'Timer Cleared' will briefly appear on the TV

The 'Collision'

message appears on

the screen.

Select the input field with D or C .

If required, change the information with A , B or the number

buttons 0..9 .

6 Press C .

7 Confirm with OK .

8 To end, press TIMER s .

9 Switch off with STANDBY m .

'NexTView Link'

This DVD recorder is equipped with the 'NexTView Link' feature. If

your television is also equipped with 'NexTView', you can mark TV

programmes on the television for programming. These TV programmes

will automatically be transmitted to a TIMER block on the DVD

recorder.

If you clear the marking of the TV programme on the television, the

corresponding TIMER block on the DVD recorder will also be cleared.

For more information, read the instruction manual of your TV set.

Selecting daily/weekly recordings

In 'Date'use SELECT to select from the following options:

'Mo-Fr': Repeated daily recordings from Monday to Friday

Programming a recording (TIMER)

'Mon': Repeated weekly recordings (every week on the same day, e.g.

Monday).

Programme numbers of the 'EXT1' and 'EXT2' scart socket

You can also programme recordings from external sources via scart

The programming information is stored in a TIMER block.

SELECT again, you will switch 'VPS/PDC' off ('*' goes out).

SELECT switch on 'VPS/PDC' ('*' lights up). If you press

socket EXT1 TO TV-I/O ('EXT1') or EXT2 AUX-I/O ('EXT2').

'Switching on 'VPS/PDC' in the 'Start' input field

Changing the recording quality in input field 'End'

Select the 'End' input field using C .

Select the 'Start' input field using TIMER s . Using

Use SELECT to select the recording mode.

5 If all information is correct, press the OK button.

The disc you have inserted will be checked.

6 To end, press TIMER s .

7 Search the position on the disc where the recording should begin.

The programmed recording will only function properly if the DVD

recorder has been switched off using the STANDBY m button.

8 Switch off with STANDBY m .

If any of the TIMER blocks are in use, 'TIMER' will light up on the

recorder display.

Page 33

ENGLISH

Directions For Use

EN 33DVDR730/0x 3.

Sound

User preferences

from the display. The DVD Recorder is switched to 'Interlaced.'

cord. 'PRO' (progressive scan) appears on the display.

- If you want to switch back, hold down N until 'PRO' disappears

- Disconnect the recorder's power cord.

- Hold down N on the DVD Recorder while reconnecting the power

'RGB + CVBS'

Depending on the TV set you are using, switching between the

'RGB' and the 'Video(CVBS/FBAS)' signal is done automatically.O'S-video only'

'EXT2 video input'

'Black level shift'

On the scart socket EXT2 AUX-I/O only the S-Video signal

will be processed.

Adapts the colour dynamics for NTSC playback when switched to 'On'

Please observe that when making recordings from a video

recorder that transmits only video (CVBS/FBAS) signals

Colour and Contrast settings

through the scart cable, recordings may be made in black and

white.

B once.

This menu appears if you select the line 'Black level shift' and press

Therefore, use this setting with caution.

EXT1 TO TV-I/O , EXT2 AUX-I/O , S VIDEO/VIDEO in , DV

Here you can set different settings for the signals at the input sockets

'EXT1 video output'

'RGB + CVBS'

IN or at the internal tuner.

Depending on the TV set you are using, switching between the

tuner.using CHANNEL q , CHANNEL r .

1 Select the programm numbers of the input socket or the internal

2 Select the appropriate line and confirm using C .

'RGB' and the 'Video(CVBS/FBAS)' signal is done automatically.

If the picture scrolls to the side or colour quality problems

appear on some TV sets when the setting is 'RGB + CVBS',

you must select 'CVBS only'.

3 Change the settings with D ,or C .

'S-video only'

4 Store the settings using OK .

On the scart socket EXT1 TO TV-I/O only the S-Video signal

will be processed.

5 Select another line or end using SYSTEM MENU .

In case the scart socket of the TV set is not suitable for

S-VIDEO (Y/C) signals, you will only see a black&white

Sound settings

picture,O'CVBS only'

You can select the settings in this menu depending on which audio

outputs are used.

Only the video (CVBS/FBAS) signal is transmitted, regardless

of the video signals (RGB, Y/C) at the scart sockets. This

setting is selected automatically when no 'RGB' or 'S-VIDEO'

AUDIO OUT L/R ), select the setting 'Off'inthe'Digital output'

If you only use the analogue audio output (red and white socket

signal is detected at the scart socket. USe this setting if picture

disturbance occurs on your TV set with the setting 'RGB +

menu.

CVBS'.

When selecting the settings 'S-video only'or'CVBS only', the RGB

PCM encoding Off

Digital output All

Analogue output Stereo

Night mode Off

'On'

The audio recording will be done in PCM-soundO'Off'

The audio recording will be done in Dolby Digital

'PCM encoding'

No picture appears on the TV after switching

Überprüfen Sie die Anzeige im Anzeigefeld des DVD-Recorders:

Check the display of your DVD recorder.

'PRO': 'Progressive Scan' is on

No display: 'Interlaced' is on. Switch your TV to the corresponding

input jack or select the corresponding connection. You can also

signal is switched off.

'Component video output'

This allows you to switch the Component Video signal between

'Interlaced' and 'Progressive Scan.'

Warning If your TV has separate connections for 'Interlaced' and

'Progressive Scan' or it does not switch automatically between the two,

it is possible that no picture will appear on the TV after it is switched

from one to the other.

Scan only if your TV has Progressive Scan.

1 Select the setting you need with SELECT . Choose Progressive

2 Confirm with OK .

switch the Component video output signal as follows:

Picture settings

In this menu you can adapt the picture from the DVD-Recorder to

your TV set.

General

This section describes how you can make additional personal settings.

User preferences

The symbols have the following meaning:

Additionally you can adjust the Colour, the Brightness, the Contrast,

for playback from the internal tuner or input sockets seperately

Picture settings



Language settings

Sound settings





Picture

Additional settings



TV shape 16:9

Horizontal video shift ï

Disc settings



P-scan verticalshift Adjustlevel…

EXT2 video input RGB + CVBS

Record settings



EXT1 video output RGB + CVBS

Component video output Interlaced

Installation



'TV shape'

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

The picture signal from your DVD recorder can be set to match your

TV set:

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

'4:3 letterbox'

for a widescreen picture with black bars at the top and

The menu bar appears.

bottomO'4:3 panscan'

for a full-height picture with the sides trimmed.O'16:9'

If this menubar is not complete visible on your wide screen TV-set,

for a widescreen TV set (16:9 screen ratio)

'Horizontal video shift'

Use this feature to adjust the position of the picture on your TV left or

right using D , C to suit the screen of your TV set.

'P-scan vertical shift'

Use this feature to adjust the position of the picture on your TV down

or up using B , A to suit the screen of your TV set.

'EXT1 video output', 'EXT2 video input'

Since RGB and S-VIDEO signals sometimes use the same connections

on a scart cable, the two signals cannot be transmitted simultaneously.

With these settings, you can decide whether RGB or S-VIDEO signals

are to be transmitted. This setting affects only the scart sockets of the

DVD recorder ('EXT1 video output': Output socket EXT1 TO

Please also observe which signals are available at which scart socket of

the TV set or how the scart sockets need to be switched.

If necessary, consult the instruction manual of your TV set.

TV-I/O and 'EXT2 video input': Input socket EXT2 AUX-I/O )

' using D oder C and confirm with

change the picture settings on your TV.

2 Select '

with C .

3 Select the corresponding function using B or A and confirm

4 Select the corresponding line using B or A and confirm with

C . For more information on each function, read the following

pages.

5 Select the corresponding function using B or A , or the setting

described in the following pages.

with D or C . Select the functions you want to change as

6 Confirm the new setting with OK .

7 Close the menu item with D .

Page 34

EN 34 DVDR730/0x3.

User preferences

'Standby'

You can switch off the clock display on your DVD recorder to save

energy. Programmed recordings will be carried out despite of this.

Zusätzlich können Sie die wichtigsten Funktionen des DVD-Recorders

im Anzeigefeld in Laufschrift darstellen (Demo).

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

STANDBY m , the clock display remains visible.

STANDBY m , the clock display is also switched off.

'Low power':

'Normal':

When the DVD recorder was switched off using

Features

STANDBY m , a list of the most important features appears

'Demo mode':

When the DVD recorder is switched off using

in the display.

'Display'

You can change the brightness of the display on the DVD recorder.

This setting only affects the DVD recorder when it is switched on.

You can also adjust this setting using the DIM button on the remote

'Bright':

control.

The display appears with normal brightness. The disc tray light

is switched on.O'Dimmed':

The display appears less bright. The disc tray light is switched

off.O'Off':

The display and the disc tray light are switched off.

'DVD player'

Der DVD-Recorder reagiert auf die mitgelieferte

Fernbedienung und auf die Fernbedienung eines DVD-Players

(Fernbedienungscode RC-6).

Fernbedienungseinstellung

In diesem Menü können Sie die Art der Fernbedienung einstellen, auf

die Ihr DVD-Recorder reagieren soll

Wählen Sie diese Einstellung, wenn die Fernbedienung Ihres

Philips-Fernsehgerätes DVD-Funktionen unterstützt.O'DVD recorder'

Der DVD-Recorder reagiert nur auf die mitgelieferte

Fernbedienung.

Additional settings

You can select the following functions in this menu:

Language settings

You can select the following settings in this menu:

Status box On

Language

Playback audio English

Live source view On

Auto standby On

Standby Normal

Display Bright

'On'

The OSD information appears for a few seconds in each

selected mode and then disappears.O'Off'

The OSD information is switched off. It is no longer

displayed on the screen.

'Status box'

Along with the on-screen menus, the OSD (On Screen Display) also

displays information on the current operating status (counter, playback,

recording, TV channel, ...) on the TV screen.

You can switch off the information about the operating status so that

the on-screen display is not recorded when making recordings on

additional devices.

Recording audio Language 1

Subtitle English

Menu English

Country Other

'Playback audio'

Playback audio language.

'Recording audio'

Wahl der Audio-Aufnahme bei zweisprachigen Sendungen

'Subtitle'

Subtitle language

'Menu'

Screen menu language

'Live source view'

With this function you can switch between the live picture or the

information of the selected TV channel/input socket in the 'Tuner

information box' (left-hand corner of the screen).

'Country'

Selection of the location

'Off'

The information about the selected TV channel or signal on

the input sockets is visible.

'On'

The live picture of the selected TV channel or signal on the input

sockets is visible.

'Auto standby'

If you haven't used the DVD-recorder for a few minutes in certain

modes (e.g.: STOP), it will switch to standby automatically. You can

cancel this function to use the DVD-recorder as a television receiver.

'On'

The DVD-Recorder leave switched on.O'Off'

The DVD-Recorder will be switched to standby after few

minutes.

'All'

'Digital output'

You can select one of the following settings for devices that are

User preferences

connected to the COAX OUT or OPTICAL OUT sockets:

Dolby Digital and DTS signals are fed unaltered to the digital

output. MPEG-2 multi-channel signals are converted to PCM

(Pulse Code Modulation).

For receivers/amplifiers with digital multichannel

decoders.O'PCM only'

Digital and MPEG-2 multi-channel signals are converted to

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation). For receivers/amplifiers

without digital multichannel decoders.O'Off'

Digital output switched off.

For devices with analogue audio input.

'Stereo'

For devices without DolbySurround or TruSurround. Use this

setting if the DVD recorder is only connected to a stereo TV

set.O'Surround'

Dolby Digital and MPEG-2 multi-channel are mixed down to a

Dolby Surround-compatible two-channel output signal.

For devices with Dolby Surround / Pro Logic Decoder .

'Analogue output'

You can select one of the following settings for devices that are

connected to the analogue audio output ():

'Night mode'

Night mode optimises the sound for playback at low volume. You are

therefore less likely to disturb your neighbours. This only works with

Dolby Digital audio on DVD video discs.

Page 35

ENGLISH

' icon is visible. The



'. The disc is now locked.



Directions For Use

EN 35DVDR730/0x 3.

Access control (Child Lock)

Authorising a disc

1 Insert a disc. The access control box will appear after a short

Child lock (DVD and VCD)

delay.

This feature enables discs to be locked for children.

When Child Lock is on, a 4-digit code (PIN) needs to be entered

2 Using A or B select 'Play once'or'Play always'.

before a disc can be played.

3 Enter your PIN code using the number buttons 0..9 .

You can also decide whether the inserted disc should always be played

or should be played only once, despite the child lock

Double-sided DVDs may have a different ID for each side. For these

•)'Play always':

discs, each side must be authorised. Video CDs may have a different ID

for each disc. For these CDs, each disc must be authorised.

This disc is stored in a memory with space for 50 child-safe discs. If

more than 50 discs are stored, the last disc in the list is removed and

the new disc is added. The screen shows 'Child safe' at the start of

Locking unlocked discs

playback.

To lock a disc that was formerly authorised follow the instructions

below

•)'Play once':

This disc is only authorised for single playback. If the recorder is

1 Insert a disc. Playback starts automatically. If the playback does not

switched off, the PIN code must be re-entered.

start automatically, press PLAY G .

Activating/deactivating child lock

icon changes to '

2 Press the STOP h button while the '

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

The menubar appears on the screen.

Disc features

Access control Enter code…

Auto resume On

' icon using D or C .

(Disc features)' using B or A and confirm with C .



If the code is new, you may have to enter the code a second

time as confirmation.

' icon using B or A .



' icon in



3 Select '

2 Select the '

4 Confirm 'Access control' using C .

5 Enter a 4-digit code of your choice.

8 Confirm with OK .

9 Quit the feature using D and SYSTEM MENU .

Unauthorised discs can only be played by entering the four-digit PIN

code.

7 Select the '

6 Select 'Child lock' using A or B and confirm with C .

To deactivate the child lock, select the '

Disk feature menu

User preferences

In this menu, you can make changes that relate to the disc:

Disc features

Access control Enter code…

Auto resume On

'Access control'

Please read the next chapter 'Access control (child lock)'.

Auto resume

If playback of a pre-recorded DVD video disc or video CD is

interrupted (using STOP h or OPEN/CLOSE J ), playback will

resume where it stopped after you reinsert the disc. This applies not

only to the current disc but also to the last 20 discs you played.

You can switch off this feature if you do not want it.

'PBC'

This line appears only if you insert a VCD.

Using this function, you can activate or deactivate the PBC menu

(Playback Control) of a Video CD. For more information, read section

'Playing a (Super) Video CD' in chapter 'Playback'.

'Finalise disc'

This function allows you to finalise DVD+R discs. If the disc has already

been finalised, this line will appear darker.

'Adapt disc format'

If a DVD+RW has been recorded in a PC drive or a different DVD

recorder, the index screen may not be displayed properly.

This feature allows you to adjust the format of the disc.

Therefore, this feature is only visible if the disc format is different.

Page 36

EN 36 DVDR730/0x3.

Access control (Child Lock)

Directions For Use

ENGLISH

Disc features

), then press OK . Access

Changing the PIN code

What do the ratings mean?

Rating 0 (displayed as '--') parental control not active.

Rating 1 (suitable for children)

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

Rating 8 (only suitable for adults)

What happens if a DVD scene contains a higher level than

the rating set?

If the recorder does not find a suitable alternative, playback will stop

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

and you must enter the four-digit code.

The menubar appears.

0 Confirm with OK . Quit using D and SYSTEM MENU .

' icon using D or C .

2 Select the '

(Disc features)' using B or A and confirm with C .



3 Select '

Changing the country

The set filter values depend on the respective country. It is therefore

necessary to enter the country to which these filter values apply.

Access control Enter code…

Auto resume On

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

The menubar appears on the screen.

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

' icon using D or C .

2 Select the '

4 Confirm 'Access control' using C .

enter the code a second time as confirmation.

5 Enter your four-digit PIN code. If the code is new, you may have to

(Disc features)' using B or A and confirm with



C .

3 Select line '

6 Select 'Change code' using A or B and confirm with C .

same code again as confirmation.

7 Enter the new code using the number buttons 0..9 . Enter the

Disc features

8 Quit using D and SYSTEM MENU .

Access control Enter code…

I have forgotten my code

Press STOP h four times (step

control is now switched off. You can now enter a new code as described

above.

Auto resume On

4 Confirm the line 'Access control' using C .

enter the code a second time as confirmation.

5 Enter your four-digit code. If the code is new, you may have to

with OK .

7 Select the corresponding country using A or B and confirm

6 Select 'Change country' using B or A and confirm with C .

8 To end, press D and then SYSTEM MENU .

Access control (Child Lock)

Parental level control (DVD video

only)

Disc features

Access control Enter code…

Auto resume On

' icon using D or C .

(Disc features)' using B or A and confirm with C .

3 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.



0..9 .

A bar appears to select the parental level.

4 Select the '

5 Select '

6 Confirm 'Access control' using C .

have to enter the code a second time as confirmation.

7 Enter a 4-digit code of your choice. If the code is new, you may

9 Select the appropriate rating using B , A or the number buttons

8 Select the 'Parental level' using A or B and confirm with C .

The menubar appears.

Films on pre-recorded DVD discs may contain scenes not suitable for

children. Therefore, some discs may contain 'Parental Control' rating

information that applies to the entire disc or to certain scenes on the

disc.

The appropriate scenes have filter values that reach from 1-8. If such a

scene is detected during playback, the filter value set on the DVD

recorder is compared to the scene. If the filter value is higher than the

setting, an alternative scene will be played (if available).

Most DVDs apply the rating to an entire DVD. Therefore, if certain

scenes exceed the rating you select, the entire disc will be blocked

from viewing.

Activating/deactivating parental level control

Preparation:

•) Switch on the TV set, and if necessary, select the programme number for the

DVD recorder.

•) Switch on the DVD recorder.

1 Press the SYSTEM MENU button on the remote control.

2 Select the '

Page 37

Access control (Child Lock)

ENGLISH

Directions For Use

EN 37DVDR730/0x 3.

is trying to record an NTSC signal. Insert a new disc or one that

PAL DISC A disc with PAL recordings has been inserted. The machine

Messages in the DVD recorder display

contains NTSC recordings.

NTSC DISC A disc with NTSC recordings has been inserted. The

attempted during recording.

machine is trying to record a PAL signal. Insert a new disc or one

that contains PAL recordings.

RECORDING An illegal action (e.g. OPEN/CLOSE J button) was

READING

The following messages may appear in your DVD recorder display

FREETITLE An empty title is selected.

the TV on, then read the paragraph on 'Initial installation' in

IS TV ON? The DVD recorder is in initial installation mode. Switch

protected disc. This message appears if an attempt is made to

DISC LOCK An attempt has been made to record during playback of a

'Installing your DVD recorder'.

insert a chapter marker ( EDIT button).

NO SIGNAL No input signal available (signal inadequate or unstable)

DISC ERR An error occurred when reading the title. If this error

MENU The menu on the screen is active

keeps occurring, please clean the disc or use a new one. For

instructions on how to clean a disc see the section on 'Cleaning

the discs' in the next chapter.

OPENING Disc tray opening

TRAY OPEN Disc tray open

DISC WARN An error occurred when writing the title. Recording was

continued; the error was skipped

CLOSING Disc tray closing

will appear on the screen.

SETUP After the automatic search the menu for setting the date/time

READING Disc being read

MENU UPDT Once recording has been successfully completed on a

will be counted.

WAIT 01 During the automatic channel search the TV channels found

DVD+RW/+R the table of contents is created.

BLOCKED The disc tray cannot be closed/opened.

been made on a new disc

INIT MENU The menu structure is created after the first recording has

SAFE REC The new recording will be added at the end of all the other

from a copy-protected DVD/videotape of a DVD/video player or

COPY PROT You received a copy-protected signal. This may come

recordings (SAFE RECORD).

EASYLINK Data transfer 'EasyLink' from the TV is in progress

from a TV channel.

During the display COPY PROTno recording will be made. A

prepared. As long as 'POST-FORMAT' is visible on the display you

POST-FORMAT After the creation of the menu structure the disc is

running recording will be interrupted.

WAIT Please wait until this message disappears. The DVD recorder is

can not operate the DVD-Recorder.

PHILIPS The DVD-Recorder has been switched on

STANDBY The DVD-Recorder has been switched off

busy performing a task.

inserted, it cannot be read.

NO DISC A disc has not been inserted for recording. If a disc has been

PHOTO The 'Digital Photo Manager' is switched on

Information about the inserted DVD is displayed on the screen

INFO

VIDEO The 'Digital Photo Manager' will be switched off

DVD compatible

BUSY The DVD recorder is processing the changes to make the disc

DVD+RW/+R

SAVING Data will be written on the inserted memory card or on a

ERASING The entire DVD+RW is being erased

EMPTYDISC The DVD+RW/+R inserted is either new or has been

completely erased (no recordings).

PROTECTED The DVD+RW/+R inserted is protected against recording.

The maximum number of titles on a disc is 48.

MAX TITLE The maximum number of titles per disc has been reached.

MAX CHAP The maximum number of chapters within a title/or the disc

has been reached. The maximum number of chapters within a title

is 99, on a disc 255. (spreaded over the whole disc).

DISC FULL The disc is full. There is no space for new recordings

Access control (Child Lock)

The symbols on your DVD recorder

display

These symbols can light up on your DVD recorder display:

A remote control signal has been received

to 'interlaced'.

o(((

Video programming system / programme delivery control:

A VPS or PDC code is transmitted for the selected TV program

VPS/PDC

During playback a 2-channel tone was detected or a

2-channel tone was received. 'I' or 'II' lights up depending on which

sound channel has been selected

LANG II

Disc bar : Displays the current position on the disc (disc

Play/Record: Single flashing segment at the current position.

Pause: Flashing segment on both sides of the current position.

•) Clock

•) Disc/title playing time

•) OTR switch-off time

•) Title name

•) Display of the programme number of the TV channel/playing

time/channel name/function.

Multi-function display/text line

•) Display of information and alerts

pointer).

IIIIIIIIIIIIIII

Stop: Illuminated segment at the current position.

An automatic recording from a satellite receiver (SAT

recording) has been programmed.

SAT

A recording (timer) has been programmed

Die Anzeige blinkt, wenn eine programmierte Aufnahme nicht

durchgeführt werden kann. Der DVD-Recorder ist entweder

eingeschaltet, oder es ist eine gesperrte DVD+RW/+R eingelegt.

TIMER

Component Video output switched to 'progressive scan'. If this

PRO

display does not appear, the Component Video output is switched

Page 38

EN 38 DVDR730/0x4.

Mechanical Instructions

4. Mechanical Instructions

4.1 Dismantling and Assembly of the Set

Remark: Exploded views can be found in chapter 10.

4.1.1 Manually opening the tray

– In case the loader is defective or cannot be opened

electrically you can open the tray manually.

– Through a slot at the underside of the cabinet a slider that

unlocks the tray can be accessed. However the slot is covered by an adhesive tape on the cabinet of the drive to prevent dust coming into the drive. Push through this adhesive tape by means of a thin screwdriver and move the slider to the left, see picture 4-1.

– Make sure that an adhesive tape has been reapplied to

the drive when repair is finished!

Figure 4-3

Figure 4-1

4.1.2 Front

– Before removing the front panel the tray has to be in the

opened position.

– Remove the top cover – Remove tray front by pulling it upwards (1), see picture 4-2 – Unplug the IDE cable that connects to the card reader (2),

see picture 4-3

– Remove the 2 screws (3) that fix the card reader – Remove the card reader PCB (4) – Remove the screw (5) that fixes the bracket of the card

reader to the front plate, see picture 4-4

– Remove the three screws (6) fixing the front panel – Release the cables from the clamps (7) – Release the two snap hooks at the sides (8) and remove

the front (9), see picture 4-5

– Remove the 9 screws (10) to remove the front plate (11),

see picture 4-6, 4-7

Figure 4-4

Figure 4-5

Figure 4-6

Figure 4-2

Figure 4-7

Page 39

4.1.3 Digital Board

– Unplug the IDE cable that connects to the card reader (1),

see picture 4-8 – Remove the 2 screws (2) that fix the card reader – Remove the card reader PCB (3) – Remove the 3 screws (4) that fix the bracket of the card

reader, see picture 4-9. – Remove the 4 screws (5) that fix the Digital Board, see

picture 4-10, and turn the Digital Board to the required

service position, see picture 4-11

Mechanical Instructions

EN 39DVDR730/0x 4.

Figure 4-8

Figure 4-9

4 4

Figure 4-11

4.1.4 Basic Engine

– Remove the tray, see picture 4-2 – Remove the 4 screws that fix the drive, see picture 4-12

Figure 4-12

4.1.5 Analog Board

Figure 4-10

– Remove the 3 screws (1) that fix the back plate to the

bottom plate, see picture 4-13

– Remove the 4 screws (2) that fix the Analog Board to the

bottom plate – Remove the Fan assy by releasing the fixing screw (3) – Remove screw safety holder (4) – Unlock the two snaps hooks at the left and right (5), see

picture 4-14, and pull the board and backplate out gently

(6) – Turn the PCB in the service position (7), see picture 4-15

Figure 4-13

Page 40

EN 40 DVDR730/0x4.

Mechanical Instructions

Figure 4-14

Figure 4-15

Page 41

5. Diagnostic Software

1 3

Diagnostic Software

EN 41DVDR730/0x 5.

Due to the complexity of the DVD recorder, the time to find a defect in the recorder can become long. To reduce this time, the recorder has been equipped with Diagnostic and Service software (DS). The DS offers functionality to diagnose the DVDR hardware and tests the following:

• Interconnections between components

• Accessibility of components

• Functionality of the audio and video paths This functionality can be accessed via several interfaces:

1. End user/Dealer script interface

2. Command Interface

5.1 End User/Dealer Script Interface

5.1.1 Description

The End user/Dealer script interface gives a diagnosis on a stand alone DVD recorder. During this mode, a number of hardware tests (nuclei) are automatically executed to check if the recorder is faulty. The diagnosis is simply a "fail" or "pass" message. If the message "FAIL" appears on the display, there is apparently a failure in the recorder. If the message "PASS" appears, the nuclei in this mode have been executed successfully. There can be still a failure in the recorder because the nuclei in this mode don't cover the complete functionality of the recorder.

5.1.2 Structure

Unplug the power cord Hold key <PLAY> pressed

while you plug the recorder

During the test, the display shows the currently run test

SET O.K.?

YES

To exit DEALER SCRIPT, unplug the power cord

Figure 5-1

The End use/Dealer script executes all diagnostic nuclei that do not need any user interaction and are meaningful on a standalone DVD recorder.

TR 13016_00

22080

Included tests: 1.DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC

2.DS_DCB_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC 3. DS_BROM_COMMUNICATION_NUC 4. DS_SYS_SETTINGSDISPLAY_NUC 5. DS_CHR_DEVTYPEGET_NUC6. DS_CHR_INT_PIC_NUC7. DS_CHR_DMA_NUC8. DS_BROM_WRITEREAD_NUC9. DS_NVRAM_COMMUNICATION_NUC10. DS_NVRAM_WRITEREAD_NUC11. DS_SDRAM_WRITEREADFAST_NUC12. DS_FLASH_WRITEREAD_NUC13.DS_FLASH_CHECKSUMPROGRAM_ NUC14.DS_SYS_HARDWAREVERSIONGET_NUC15. DS_VIP_DEVTYPEGET_NUC16. DS_VIP_COMMUNICATION_NUC17. DS_DVIO_LINKDEVTYPEGET_NUC18. DS_DVIO_PHYDEVTYPEGET_NUC19. DS_DVIO_LINKCOMMUNICATION_NUC20. DS_DVIO_PHYCOMMUNICATION_NUC21.DS_PSCAN_COMMUNICATI ONDENC_NUC22.DS_PSCAN_COMMUNICATIONDEINTERLACER_NU C23. DS_BE_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC24.DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIO NIICNVRAM_NUC25.DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICTUNER_NUC26.D S_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICSOUNDPROCESSOR_NUC27.DS_ANA B_COMMUNICATIONIICAVSELECTOR_NUC28. DS_ANAB_CHECKSUMPROGRAM_NUC

5.1.3 Contents

Page 42

EN 42 DVDR730/0x5.

Diagnostic Software

5.2 Trade Mode

TRADE MODE

When the recorder is in Trade Mode, the recorder cannot be controlled by means of the front key buttons, but only by means of the remote control.

IF TRADE MODE OFF

UNPLUG THE RECORDER

PRESS 2 KEYS

SIMULTANEOUSLY

PLUG THE RECORDER

RECORDER IS IN TRADE MODE

WHEN PRESSING FRONT

KEYS, THE RECORDER

DOESN'T RESPOND

IF TRADE MODE ON

UNPLUG THE RECORDER

PRESS 2 KEYS

SIMULTANEOUSLY

PLUG THE RECORDER

RECORDER IS IN NORMAL MODE

WHEN PRESSING FRONT

KEYS, THE RECORDER

WILL RESPOND

CL 16532095_071.eps

Figure 5-2

5.3 Virgin mode

If you want that the recorder starts up in Virgin mode, follow this procedure:

• Unplug the recorder

• plug the recorder again while you keep the STAND BY/ON key pressed

• the set starts up in Virgin mode.

5.4 Command Mode Interface

150801

5.4.2 Error Handling

Each nucleus returns an error code. This code contains six numerals, which means:

[ XX YY ZZ ]

Error code Nucleus number

Nucleus group nu

Figure 5-4

The nucleus group numbers and nucleus numbers are the same as above.

5.4.3 Command Mode Interface

Set-Up Physical Interface Components

Hardware required:

• Service PC

• one free COM port on the Service PC

• special cable to connect DVD recorder to Servi ce PC The service PC must have a terminal emulation program (e.g. Hyperterminal) installed and must have a free COM port (e.g. COM1). Activate the terminal emulation program and check that the port settings for the free COM port are: 19200 bps, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit and no flow control. The free COM port must be connected via a special cable to the RS232 port of the DVD recorder. This special cable will also connect the test pin, which is available on the connector, to ground (i.e. activate test pin).

Code number of PC interface cable: 3122 785 90017

5.4.1 Nuclei Numeration

Each nucleus has a unique number of four digits. This number is the input of the command mode.

[ XX YY ]

Nucleus number Nucleus group nu

Figure 5-3

The following groups are defined for Digital Board Chrysalis:

Group number Group name 0 Basic / Scripts 1Chrysalis 2 Boot EEPROM 3NVRAM 4SDRAM 5Flash 6 Video Input Processor 7DVIO 8 Progressive Scan 9 Basic Engine 10 Display and Control Board 11 Analogue Board 12 System

Activation Digital Board Chrysalis

1. Pull the mains cord from the recorder and reconnect it again (reboot).

2. The next welcome message will appear on the PC:

Startup screen

Figure 5-5

Now, the prompt 'DS:>' will appear. The diagnostic software is now ready to receive commands. The commands that can be given are the numbers of the nuclei. If you see above shown screen, continue with paragraph 'Nuclei Codes'.

1. It is possible that the next messages will appear when starting the DVD+RW for the first time

Page 43

Diagnostic Software

EN 43DVDR730/0x 5.

Error messages startup

Figure 5-6

Error messages D&S program

Figure 5-7

Diversity String Input

1. Execute nucleus 1226 to enter the string. Please see adjustment instructions in chapter 8 for details

Nucleus 1226 execution with string

Figure 5-9

1. To check if the hardware info is filled correctly, you can execute nucleus 1228.

Nucleus 1228 info example

In these cases, the boot EEPROM of the Chrysalis Digital Board does not contain the required string with the hardware information. To update the Digital Board with the correct string, nucleus 1226 must be executed. See next section 'Diversity String Input'.

There can also be the next error message.

Figure 5-10

1. Exit the 'Terminal' program.

1. Reboot the DVD recorder to allow the software to start.

Command overview Digital Board Chrysalis

Below you will find an overview of the nuclei, their numbers, and their error codes. This overview is preliminary and subject to modifications.

Figure 5-8

Enter "Y" to program a safe string. With this automatically generated string the board will work in principle but it has to be checked if all board settings were detected correctly.

Page 44

EN 44 DVDR730/0x5.

Chrysalis (CHR)

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_DevTypeGet

Nucleus Number 100 Description Sends the device ID and the module ids and revisions of the PNX7100 (Chrysalis) to the

stdout port. User Input None Example DS:> 100

Device ID 7100

Codec ID PNX7100_MF2

F-BCU (0x0102) 1.0 INTC (0x011d) 1.0 PCI-XIO(0x0113) 1.0

SIF(0x013b) 1.0 EJTAG (0x0104) 0.0 S-BCU (0x0102) 1.0

BOOT (0x010a) 1.0 CONFIG (0x013f) 1.0 RESET (0x0123) 1.0

DEBUG (0x0116) 0.0 UART0 (0x0107) 0.1 UART1 (0x0107) 0.1

UART2 (0x0107) 0.1 UART3 (0x0107) 0.1 I2C0 (0x0105) 0.1

I2C1 (0x0105) 0.1 GPIO (0x013c) 1.0 SYNC (0x013a) 1.0

DISP0 (0xa015) 0.1 DISP1 (0xa00f) 0.0 OSD (0x0136) 0.1

SPU (0xa00e) 0.0 MIXER (0x0137) 1.0 DENC (0x0138) 0.1

CCIR (0x0139) 1.0 VDEC (0x0133) 0.1 PARSER (0xa00d) 0.0

DV (0xa00c) 0.0 BEI (0xa00a) 0.0 IDE (0xa009) 0.0

SGDX (0xa008)0.0 BYTE (0xa00b) 0.0 OUTPUT (0xa003) 0.0

ACOMP (0xa000) 0.0 VFE (0xa001) 0.0 VCOMP (0xa002) 0.0

SCR (0x0000) 0.0 SIFF (0xa011) 0.0 WMD (0xa010) 0.0

AUDIO0 (0xa015) 0.1 AUDIO1 (0xa00f) 0.0 PSCAN (0xa018) 0.0

010000:

Test OK @

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_TestImageOn Nucleus Number 101 Description Generates a test-image of a selected video standard on selected video output on the digital

board. When no input is given, the default values will be used. Use nucleus

DS_ANAB_VideoRouting to route the video signal on the analogue board output User Input The user has to decide which test image, video standard and video output must be used:

Test image id: 0 VERTICAL_COLOURBAR (default) 1 HORIZONTAL_COLOURBAR 2 WHITE 3 YELLOW 4 CYAN 5 GREEN 6 MAGENTA 7 RED 8 BLUE 9 BLACK 10 GRAY

Video standard:

PAL (default)

NTSC

Video output:

ALL CVBS and YC and RGB (default)

CVBS

RGB

YUV

PSCAN progressive scan

Example DS:> 101

010100:

Test OK @

DS:> 101 0 pal cvbs

010100:

Test OK @

DS:> 101 4 ntsc yc

010100:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_TestImageOff Nucleus Number 102 Description Switches the test-image off. User Input None

Page 45

Diagnostic Software

EN 45DVDR730/0x 5.

Example DS:> 102

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_SineOn Nucleus Number 103 Description Generate an audio sine signal on the audio output of the digital board. Note: Left channel

User Input None Example DS:> 103

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_SineOff Nucleus Number 104 Description Stop generating the audio sine signal User Input None Example DS:> 104

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_SineBurst Nucleus Number 105 Description Generate an audio sine signal on the audio output of the digital board for 4 seconds.

User Input None Example DS:> 105

010200: Test OK @

6kHz, right channel 12 kHz sine. Make sure to route the signal first.

010300: Test OK @

010400: Test OK @

Note: Left channel 6kHz, right channel 12 kHz sine with some known hick-ups

010500: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_MuteOn Nucleus Number 106 Description Mute the audio outputs of the digital board User Input None Example DS:> 106

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_MuteOff Nucleus Number 107 Description De-mute the audio outputs of the digital board User Input None Example DS:> 107

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_DvLedOn Nucleus Number 108 Description Check the connection to the DV-LED on the digital board by switching it on User Input None Example DS:> 108

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_DvLedOff Nucleus Number 109 Description Switch off the DV-LED on the digital board User Input None Example DS:> 109

010600: Test OK @

010700: Test OK @

010800: Test OK @

010900: Test OK @

Page 46

EN 46 DVDR730/0x5.

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_MacroVisionOn Nucleus Number 110 Description Turn on MacroVision. User Input None Example DS:> 110

011000:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_MacroVisionOff Nucleus Number 111 Description Turn off MacroVision. User Input None Example DS:> 111

011100:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_Peek Nucleus Number 112 Description Peek a value on a specified address User Input The address to peek on Example DS:> 112 0xa0700000

011200: Value read = 0x000001BD

Test OK @

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_Poke Nucleus Number 113 Description Poke a value on a specified address User Input The address to poke and the value: <address><value> Example DS:> 113 0xa0700000 0xaabbccdd

011300:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_INT_PICInterrupts Nucleus Number 114 Description Test all interrupts of the priority interrupt controller User Input Example DS:> 114

011400:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_DMA_TestDMA Nucleus Number 115 Description Test the memory to memory DMA transfer User Input Example DS:> 115

Boot EEPROM (BROM)

Nucleus Name DS_BROM_Communication Nucleus Number 200 Description Check the communication between the IIC controller of the Chrysalis and the boot

User Input None Example DS:> 200

011500:

Test OK @

EEPROM

020000:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BROM_WriteRead Nucleus Number 201 Description Check whether the Boot EEPROM can be written to and read from User Input None

Page 47

Diagnostic Software

EN 47DVDR730/0x 5.

Example DS:> 201

NVRAM

Nucleus Name DS_NVRAM_Communication Nucleus Number 300 Description Check the communication between the IIC controller of the Chrysalis and the EEPROM User Input None Example DS:> 300

Nucleus Name DS_NVRAM_WriteRead Nucleus Number 301 Description Check whether the EEPROM can be written to and read from User Input None Example DS:> 301

Nucleus Name DS_NVRAM_Clear Nucleus Number 302 Description Make the EEPROM empty, containing all zeroes. User Input None Example DS:> 302

020100: Test OK @

030000: Test OK @

030100: Test OK @

030200: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_NVRAM_Modify Nucleus Number 303 Description Modifies one or more locations in NVRAM and updates the checksum of the section

User Input 1. The location that must be modified

Example DS:> 303 DIAGNOSTICS 5 1 0x5a

Nucleus Name DS_NVRAM_Read Nucleus Number 304 Description Read out one or more locations in the NVRAM User Input 1. The location which must be read

Example 304 DIAGNOSTICS 0 6

SDRAM

Nucleus Name DS_SDRAM_WriteRead Nucleus Number 400 Description Check all data lines, address lines and memory locations of the SDRAM User Input None Example DS:> 400

modified

i.e. "ALL" "BOOT" "DIAGNOSTICS" "DOWNLOAD" "CONFIG" "RECORDER" or no string if an offset from the base address of the NVRAM is required

2. The offset and data which to put on the selected location <offset> <length> <data>

030300:Section is modified successfully Test OK @

i.e. "ALL" "BOOT" "DIAGNOSTICS" "DOWN LOAD" "CONFIG" "RECORDER" or no string if an offset from the base address of the NVRAM is required

2. The offset and number of bytes to read <offset> <length>

030400: Value read = 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x5A Test OK @

040000: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SDRAM_WriteReadFast Nucleus Number 401

Page 48

EN 48 DVDR730/0x5.

Description Check all data lines and address lines of the SDRAM User Input None Example DS:> 401

040100:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SDRAM_Write Nucleus Number 402 Description Write to a specific memory address User Input 1. The location that must be modified

( SDRAM starts at address 0xA0000000 )

2. The value to put on the selected location

Example DS:> 402 0xa1000010 0xad112222

040200:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SDRAM_Read Nucleus Number 403 Description Read from a specific memory address User Input The location from which the data must be read

( SDRAM starts at address 0xA0000000 ) Example DS:> 403 0xa1000010

040300: Value read = 0xAD112222

Test OK @

Diagnostic Software

FLASH

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_DevTypeGet Nucleus Number 500 Description Get the device (revision) type information of the FLASH IC. (manufacturer and device ID) User Input None Example DS:> 500

050000: Found FLASH memory: Manufacturer ID: 0x01 Device ID : 0x01 Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_WriteRead Nucleus Number 501 Description Check whether the FLASH can be written to and read from User Input None Example DS:> 501

050100: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_Read Nucleus Number 502 Description Read from a specific memory address in FLASH User Input The location from which data must be read

Example DS:> 502 0xb8000000

( FLASH starts at address 0xB8000000 )

050200: Value read = 0x3C08A000 Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_ChecksumProgram Nucleus Number 503 Description Check the checksum of the application partitions by recalculating and comparing partition

checksums User Input None Example DS:> 503

050300:

BootCode checksum is: 0xBABE5B6F, which is correct

Diagnostics checksum is : 0xBABEBAFF, which is correct

Download checksum is: 0xBABEEDBF, which is correct

Application checksum is : 0xBABE8EEC, which is correct

Test OK @

Page 49

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_CalculateChecksum Nucleus Number 504 Description Calculate the checksum over all memory addresses. Used to check entire FLASH contents User Input None Example DS:> 504

050400: The Checksum = 0xBABE30A4 Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_CalculateChecksumFast Nucleus Number 505 Description Calculate a checksum over a selected number of address locations User Input None Example DS:> 505

050500: The Checksum = 0xBABEB064 Test OK @

Video Input Processor (VIP)

Nucleus Name DS_VIP_DevTypeGet Nucleus Number 600 Description Get the device (revision) type information of the VIP IC User Input None Example DS:> 600

060000: Found SAA7118 Test OK @

EN 49DVDR730/0x 5.

Nucleus Name DS_VIP_Communication Nucleus Number 601 Description Check the communication between the IIC controller of the chrysalis and the VIP IC User Input None Example DS:> 601

060100: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_VIP_ClockOutputOn Nucleus Number 602 Description Switch the clock output on User Input None Example DS:> 602

060200: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_VIP_ClockOutputOff Nucleus Number 603 Description Switch the clock output off User Input None Example DS:> 603

Nucleus Name DS_VIP_SelectInput Nucleus Number 604 Description Select an input video path to be switched to the analogue output pin (AOUT) of the VIP User Input The input to select, see table below.

060300: Test OK @

1 CVBS_Y_IN_A 2 CVBS_OUT_B 3 CVBS_Y_IN_B 4 CVBS_Y_IN_C 6 C_IN 8 G_IN 9 Y_IN 13 B_IN 14 U_IN 18 R_IN 19 V_IN

Page 50

EN 50 DVDR730/0x5.

Diagnostic Software

Example DS:> 604 1

Digital Video Input Output (DVIO)

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_LinkDevTypeGet Nucleus Number 700 Description Get the device (revision) type information of the 1394 Link layer IC User Input None Example DS:> 700

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_PhyDevTypeGet Nucleus Number 701 Description Get the device (revision) type information of the 1394 Physical layer IC User Input None Example DS:> 701

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_LinkCommunication Nucleus Number 702 Description Check the accessibility of the 1394 Link layer IC by writing to and reading from a specific

User Input None Example DS:> 702

060400:

Test OK @

070000: Device type of the link layer IC: ffc00301

Test OK @

070100:

Device type of the phy layer IC: 0

Test OK @

address

070200:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_PhyCommunication Nucleus Number 703 Description Check the accessibility of the 1394 Physical layer IC by writing to and reading from a

specific address User Input None Example DS:> 703

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_Routing Nucleus Number 704 Description Route a DV stream containing an audio and video signal through the physical and link layer

User Input None, test works for both NTSC and PAL Example DS:> 704

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_DetectNode Nucleus Number 705 Description Check whether a DV node can be detected by the hardware User Input None, test works for both NTSC and PAL Example DS:> 705

070300:

Test OK @

ICs to the Chrysalis

070400:

Test OK @

070500:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_DetectStream Nucleus Number 706 Description Check whether a DV stream can be detected by the hardware User Input None, test works for both NTSC and PAL Example DS:> 706

070600:

Test OK @

Page 51

Diagnostic Software

Progressive Scan (PSCAN)

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_CommunicationDenc Nucleus Number 801 Description Check the communication between the IIC controller of the chrysalis and the progressive

scan DENC-IC User Input None Example DS:> 801

080100:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_TestImageOn Nucleus Number 802 Description Generate the test images that are present on the progressive scan IC. User Input In case of ADV7196:

When no input is given “HATCH” is the default

-“HATCH”

-“FRAME”

Remark:

“HATCH” is a crosshatch test pattern (horizontal and vertical white lines are displayed

against a black background)

“FRAME” is a uniform coloured frame/field test pattern (default white).

In case of FLI2300: Nothing. Example DS:> 802 HATCH

080200:

Test OK @

EN 51DVDR730/0x 5.

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_TestImageOff Nucleus Number 803 Description Switch off the generated test image User Input None Example DS:> 803

080300:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_TestImageColourSettingsSet Nucleus Number 804 Description Set the colour of the hatch- or the frame- field to a different value than the default white User Input A colour string of one of the next non-case sensitive strings ( WHITE, BLACK, RED,

GREEN, BLUE, YELLOW, CYAN, MAGENTA ) or Y Cr Cb (hexa-) decimal values. Example DS:> 804 yellow

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_TestImageColourSettingsGet Nucleus Number 805 Description Get the colour settings of the hatch- or the frame- field. User Input None Example DS:> 805

080400:

Test OK @

DS:> 804 0x6a 0xde 0xca

080400:

Test OK @

080500: Colour Y Cr Cb values: 0xD2 0x92 0x10

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_Routing Nucleus Number 806 Description Route a video signal from the host processor through the progressive scan ICs to the

progressive scan output of the set.

Note: to route the progressive scan to the output of the set, first call nucleus 1112 with

parameter 0 (video routing on analogue board). User Input None Example DS:> 806

080600:

Test OK @

Page 52

EN 52 DVDR730/0x5.

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_DevTypeGetDeinterlacer Nucleus Number 807 Description Get the device (revision) type information of the progressive scan deinterlacer. User Input None Example DS:> 807

080700: Chip name : 2300 Chip version : 1 Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_CommunicationDeinterlacer Nucleus Number 808 Description Check the communication between the IIC controller of the chrysalis and the progressive

scan Deinterlacer-IC User Input None Example DS:> 808

080800:

Test OK @

Basic Engine (BE)

Nucleus Name DS_BE_CommunicationEcho Nucleus Number 900 Description Check the communication between the digital board and the basic engine by issuing an

echo command over the S2B interface User Input None Example DS:> 900

090000:

Test OK @

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_BE_Reset Nucleus Number 901 Description Reset the basic engine User Input None Example DS:> 901

090100:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_VersionGet Nucleus Number 903 Description Get the version of the basic engine and that of the optical unit User Input None Example DS:> 903

Nucleus Name DS_BE_GetSelftestResult Nucleus Number 902 Description Return the self-test results through the service port User Input None Example DS:> 902

Nucleus Name DS_BE_Tr ayOut Nucleus Number 904 Description Open the tray of the basic engine User Input None Example DS:> 904

090300: BE version = 20.09.18 Optical unit version = 3C.00.09.41.08

Test OK @

090200:

Test OK @

090400:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_Tr ayIn Nucleus Number 905 Description Close the tray of the basic engine

Page 53

Diagnostic Software

User Input None Example DS:> 905

090500: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_WriteReadDvdRw Nucleus Number 906 Description Write data to and read data from a DVD+RW disc through the basic engine for verification

of the writing User Input None Example DS:> 906

090600: Testing on sector 0x5dbe0: OK

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_WriteReadDvdR Nucleus Number 907 Description Write data to and read data from a DVD+R disc through the basic engine for verification of

the writing User Input None Example DS:> 907

090700: Testing on sector 0x36210: OK

Test OK @

EN 53DVDR730/0x 5.

Nucleus Name DS_BE_StatisticalInformationGet Nucleus Number 908 Description Retrieve the statistical information from the basic engine User Input None Example DS:> 908

Total time the power power on (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of reading CDROM discs (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of reading high DVD SL discs (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of reading other DVD SL discs (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of reading high DVD DL siscs (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of reading other DVD DL discs (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of reading high DVD+R discs (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of reading other DVD+R discs (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of reading high DVD+RW discs (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of reading other DVD+RW discs (HR:MIN) 1: 0h

Total time of writing DVD+R discs in 2HRS mode (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of writing DVD+R discs in 4HRS mode (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of writing DVD+R discs in 6HRS mode (HR:MIN) 0: 2h

Total time of writing DVD+RW discs in 2HRS mode (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

Total time of writing DVD+RW discs in 4HRS mode (HR:MIN) 0: 3h

Total time of writing DVD+RW discs in 6HRS mode (HR:MIN) 0: 0h

090800:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_StatisticalInformationReSet Nucleus Number 909 Description Reset the statistical information in the basic engine User Input None Example DS:> 909

090900:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_ErrorLogGet Nucleus Number 910 Description Get the error log from the basic engine User Input None Example DS:> 910

Momentary errors (0-9): 0x21 0x00 0x00 0x20 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

Cumulative errors (1-9): 0x00 0x80 0x20 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00

Software fatal assert : 256 cpowermanager.cpp

091000:

Test OK @

Page 54

EN 54 DVDR730/0x5.

Nucleus Name DS_BE_ErrorLogReset Nucleus Number 911 Description Reset the error log in the basic engine User Input None Example DS:> 911

091100: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_JitterOptimise Nucleus Number 912 Description Perform jitter optimisation:A formatted DVD must be loaded into the engine before

executing this nucleus User Input none Example DS:> 912

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_FocusOn Nucleus Number 913 Description Put the laser of the BE into focus User Input None Example DS:> 913

091300:

Test OK @

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_BE_FocusOff Nucleus Number 914 Description Turn off putting the laser of the BE into focus User Input None Example DS:> 914

091400:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_MotorOn Nucleus Number 915 Description Turn on the turntable motor User Input None Example DS:> 915

091500:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_MotorOff Nucleus Number 916 Description Turn off the turntable motor User Input None Example DS:> 916

Nucleus Name DS_BE_R adialOn Nucleus Number 917 Description Close the radial loop User Input A formatted DVD must be loaded into the engine before executing this nucleus Example DS:> 917

091600:

Test OK @

091700:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RadialOff Nucleus Number 918 Description Open the radial loop User Input None Example DS:> 918

091800:

Test OK @

Page 55

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RadialCalibration Nucleus Number 919 Description Calibrate the radial loop User Input A formatted DVD must be loaded into the engine before executing this nucleus Example DS:> 919

091900: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_Tilt Nucleus Number 920 Description Test the tilt mechanism control loop, or allow its proper functioning to be

measured.Before executing this nucleus a disc must be loaded into the recorder User Input None Example DS:> 920

092000:

Tilt sensor bathtub: (71,-12,145)(68,-12,135)(62,-10,120)(56,-92,97)(50,-75,86)

(44,-59,80)(41,-52,80)(35,-37,86)(29,-22,86)

(23,-7,92)(17,8,111)(11,23,135)(8,31,138)(5,39,158)

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_CheckDisc Nucleus Number 921 Description Check whether there is a disc inside the BE User Input None Example DS:> 921

092100: A DVD+Rewritable is loaded (disc is empty or partially recorded)

Test OK @

DS:> 921

092100: No Disc is loaded

Test OK @

EN 55DVDR730/0x 5.

Nucleus Name DS_BE_SledgeMotor Nucleus Number 922 Description Send the sledge to its home position, then to the middle of the disc, and then to the

end. User Input None Example DS:> 922

Nucleus Name DS_BE_ReadTocInfo Nucleus Number 924 Description Read the TOC from the disc. This gives a good indication if the BE works properly.. User Input None Example DS:> 924

092200:

Test OK @

092400:

TOC info [hex] = 91 3A 0C

Test OK@

DS:> 924

092403:

The BE returned: 0x10 #{no_disc_error} No disc is detected

Error@

DS:> 924

092403: The BE returned: 0x1e #{illegal_medium_error} Engine unable to handle

current disc. Probably illegal medium.

Error @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_DiscErase Nucleus Number 925 Description Perform a DC-erase on a DVD+RW disc. User Input None

Page 56

EN 56 DVDR730/0x5.

Diagnostic Software

Example DS:> 925

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RegionCodeSet Nucleus Number 928 Description Set the region code in the AV3. User Input Region code Example DS:> 928 1

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RegionCodeGet Nucleus Number 929 Description Read the region code from the AV3. User Input None Example DS:> 929

The entirely disc will be erased. Are you sure you want this?[y/n]

092500: Test OK @

092800: Test OK @

DS:> 928 This nucleus is not supported by the engine 092800: Test OK @

092900: DVD region 1 Test OK @

DS:> 929This nucleus is not supported by the engine 092900: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RegionCounterReset Nucleus Number 930 Description Reset the region counter in the AV3. User Input None Example DS:> 930

093000: Test OK @

DS:> 930 This nucleus is not supported by the engine 093000: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_AdjustLaserControl Nucleus Number 931 Description Adjust the DVD-M (with the OPU) with PCBA. (So adjusts the two PCBS to each other) User Input None Execution Time 30 seconds Example DS:> 931

093100: Test OK @

Display and Control Board (DCB)

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_CommunicationEcho Nucleus Number 1000 Description Check the communication between the digital board and the DCB by issuing an echo

command User Input None Example DS:> 1000

100000:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_VersionGet Nucleus Number 1001 Description Get the version of the DCB

Page 57

Diagnostic Software

User Input None Example DS:> 1001100100: DCB version: 13Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_LightDisplay Nucleus Number 1002 Description Light the entire display of the DCB, and clear the display after confirmation.User

confirmation is necessary. User Input None Example DS:> 1002

100200:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_Keyboard Nucleus Number 1004 Description Check all keys of the keyboard by confirming the key-code displayed of each key. User Input None Example DS:> 1004

100400:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_RemoteControl Nucleus Number 1005 Description Check the interface between the remote control and the DCB by checking the key-

code displayed User Input None Example DS:> 1005

100500:

Test OK @

EN 57DVDR730/0x 5.

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_Led Nucleus Number 1006 Description Switch the record LED on, and after confirmation off.

User Input None Example DS:> 1006

Analogue Board (ANAB)

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationEcho Nucleus Number 1100 Description Check the communication between the digital board and the analogue board by

User Input None Example DS:> 1100

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationIicNvram Nucleus Number 1101 Description Check the communication between the digital board and the NVRAM on the analogue

User Input None Example DS:> 1101

The user confirms by pressing the REC key, STOP key, or the PLAY key on the local

keyboard. The PLAY key confirms that the LED is on and the REC key

100600:

Test OK @

issuing some echo string.

110000: Hello Analogue Board

Test OK @

board.

110100:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationIicTuner Nucleus Number 1102 Description Check the communication between the digital board and the tuner on the analogue

board User Input None

Page 58

EN 58 DVDR730/0x5.

Diagnostic Software

Example DS:> 1102

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationIicDataSlicer Nucleus Number 1103 Description Check the communication between the digital board and the data slicer on the

User Input None Example DS:> 1103

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationIicSoundProcessor Nucleus Number 1104 Description Check the communication between the digital board and the sound processor on the

User Input None Example DS:> 1104

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationIicAVSelector Nucleus Number 1105 Description Check the communication between the digital board and the A/V-selector on the

User Input None Example DS:> 1105

110200: Test OK @

analogue board

110300: Test OK @

analogue board

110400: Test OK @

analogue board

110500: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_HardwareVersionGet Nucleus Number 1106 Description Get the hardware version of the analogue board User Input None Example DS:> 1106

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_SoftwareVersionBootGet Nucleus Number 1107 Description Get the software version of the boot software of the analogue board User Input None Example DS:> 1107

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_SoftwareVersionDownloadGet Nucleus Number 1108 Description Get the software version of the download software of the analogue board User Input None Example DS:> 1108

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_SoftwareVersionApplGet Nucleus Number 1109 Description Get the software version of the application software of the analogue board User Input None Example DS:> 1109

110600: Analogue hardware version : 11 Test OK @

110700: Bootcode application version : 11.00.11 Test OK @

110800: Download application version : 11.00.06 Test OK @

110900: Recorder application version : 11.00.23 Test OK @

Page 59

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_SoftwareVersionDiagnosticsGet Nucleus Number 1110 Description Get the software version of the diagnostic software of the analogue board User Input None Example DS:> 1110

111000: Diagnostics application version : 11.00.13

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_ChecksumProgram Nucleus Number 1111 Description Check the checksum of the several partitions by recalculating and comparing partition

checksums User Input None Example DS:> 1111

BootCode checksum is: 0xBABE6240, which is correct

Diagnostics checksum is : 0xBABEBEAD, which is correct

Download checksum is: 0xBABEA6B7, which is correct

Application checksum is : 0xBABEB277, which is correct

111100:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_VideoRouting Nucleus Number 1112 Description Perform the routing of the video paths on the analogue board User Input The user has to input the correct parameter for the routing (see table 'video routing'

below). Example DS:> 1112

00111200:

Test OK @

EN 59DVDR730/0x 5.

Video routing paths (Europe)

Path ID Description

0 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from digital board and will be re-routed back to the digital

board. 1 Input signal is from FRONT VIDEO(CVBS) IN and will be routed to the digital board. 2 No Routing. 3 Input signal is from FRONT S-VIDEO(Y/C) and will be routed to the digital board. 4 No Routing. 5 Input signal is CVBS from SCART1 and will be routed to the digital board. 6 Input signal is CVBS from SCART2 and will be routed to the digital board. 7 Input Signal is CVBS from Digital Board and it will be routed to Scart1 and Scart2. 8 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from ANTENNA IN and will be routed to SCART2. 9 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from SCART1 and will be routed to SCART2. 10 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from SCART2 and will be routed to SCART1. 11 Signal path is routed Fast Blank from Scart2 pin16 and will be routed SCART1 pin16 12 Input Signal is YC from Digital Board and it will be routed to SCART1. 13 14 No Routing. 15 Input Signal is CVBS from TUNER and it will be routed to Digital . 16 No Routing. 17 Input Signal is routed from digital board YC to REAR S-VIDEO(YC) OUT 18 Signal path is routed from digital board RGB to RGB SCART1 and from digital board

CVBS to digital board CVBS. 19 No Routing. 20 Input RGB Signal is routed from Digital Board to SCART1(RGB),Input CVBS Signal

21 Input Y/C Signal from Digital Board is routed to Rear Y/C Connector and Input Y/C

from Digital Board to Digital Board and Fast Blanking Signal from SCART2 to

SCART1.

Signal from Front Y/C connector is routed to Digital Board.

Video routing paths (NAFTA)

Path ID Description

0 No Routing. 1 Input signal is from FRONT VIDEO(CVBS) IN and will be routed to the digital board.This

routing is same as the above path id.

Page 60

EN 60 DVDR730/0x5.

2 Input signal is from REAR VIDEO(CVBS) IN and will be routed to the digital board. 3 Input signal is from FRONT S-VIDEO(Y/C) IN and the signal received will be routed to the

digital board. 4 Input signal is from REAR S-VIDEO(Y/C) IN and will be routed to the digital board. 5 No Routing. 6 No routing. 7 No routing. 8 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from TUNER and will be routed to Y Pin of Rear Y/C

Connector.This will give only black/White Picture . 9 Input signal is from YUV IN and will be routed to YUV OUT.This is possible only if Digital

Board routes back YUV signal received back to the Analogue board(DENC) 10 No routing. 11 No routing. 12 No Routing. 13 No Routing. 14 No Routing. 15 Input CVBS Signal from Tuner is routed to Digital Board.. 16 No Routing. 17 No Routing. 18 Input Signal from CVBS Rear In is routed to Digital Board. This is the same as path ID 02. 19 Input Y/C signal from Digital Board is routed to Y/C Rear Out Connector and Input signal from

Y/C Front In Connector is routed to Y/C Digital Board. 20 Y/C signal from Digital Board is routed to Y/C Rear Out Connector and Input signal from Y/

C Rear In Connector is routed to Y/C Digital Board. 23 The Video signal received from the Digital board will be output on Modulator channel 3. 24 The Video signal received from the Digital board will be output on Modulator channel 4.

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_AudioRouting Nucleus Number 1113 Description Perform the routing of the audio paths on the analogue board User Input The user has to input the correct parameter for the routing (see table 'audio routing'

Example DS:> 1113

Audio routing paths (Europe)

Path ID Description

0 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board. 1 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board. 2 No Routing. 3 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART1 and will be routed to the digital board. 4 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART2 and will be routed to the digital board. 5 No routing. 6 No routing. 7 Input Audio signal is from the digital Board and it will be routed to the SCART1 and SCART2 8 Input AUDIO signal from TUNER and will be routed to SCART2. 9 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART1 and will be routed to SCART2. 10 Input audio signal from SCART2 is routed to SCART1. 11 Input Audio signal is routed from DVIO to SCART2. 12 13 No Routing. 14 Input is Audio Signal from DVIO and it will be routed to Digital Board. 15 Input is Audio Signal from TUNER and it will be routed to Digital Board.. 16 No routing. 17 No Routing. 18 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to SCART2. 21 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board.

below)

00111300:

Test OK @

Audio routing paths (NAFTA)

Path ID Description

0 No Routing. 1 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board. 2 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 2 and will be routed to the digital board.

Page 61

Diagnostic Software

EN 61DVDR730/0x 5.

3 Input Audio Signal is routed from FRONT Cinch In to Digital Board.(This is same as path ID

4 Input Signal is from Rear Cinch In1 and it will be routed to Digital Board.. 5 No routing. 6 No routing. 7 No routing. 8 No Routing. 9 No routing. 10 No Routing. 11 No Routing. 12 No Routing. 13 Input Signal is from Digital Board and it will be routed to the digital board. 14 No routing. 15 Input is Audio Signal from TUNER and it will be routed to Digital Board. 16 Input signal is AUDIO from dvio board and will be routed to Digital Board. 17 No routing. 18 No routing. 19 No routing. 20 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 2 and will be routed to the digital board. 21 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 1 and will be routed to the digital board. 22 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 1 and will be routed to the digital board. 23 The Audio signal received from the Digital board will be outputted on Modulator channel 3. 24 The Audio signal received from the Digital board will be outputted on Modulator channel 4.

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_SelectTunerChannel Nucleus Number 1114 Description Set the tuner to receive a valid audio and video signal User Input <Frequency*16> <video standard id>Tuner frequency: to tune the tuner to e.g. 216

Example DS:> 1114 3456 16

01)

MHz, this parameter must be 3456. (Since 216*16 = 3456. This is to avoid the decimal points to the parameter list.)Video standard id: The table below shows which video standards are possible

Video standard id Europe NAFTA 163248648096112 PAL_BG NTSC

PAL_I Invalid PAL_DK Invalid SEC_L Invalid SEC_LS Invalid SEC_BG Invalid SEC_DK Invalid

111400: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_IICWriteRead Nucleus Number 1115 Description Perform an IIC write and read action on the analogue board User Input Writing:

Example DS:> 1115 w 0x94 2 0x06 0x02

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_ClockAdjust Nucleus Number 1116 Description Set the clock to the value passed through in the YYYY MM DD HH MM SS format User Input <YYYY> <MM> <DD> <HH> <MM> <SS> Example DS:> 1116 2002 11 11 11 11 11

[<W>|<w>] [I2C address] [number of data bytes to write] with <data[0]...data[n]> Max 16 data bytes (n < 16). Reading: [<R>|<r>] [I2C address] [number of data bytes to read] Max 16 data bytes (n < 16).

111500: Test OK @

111600: Test OK @

Page 62

EN 62 DVDR730/0x5.

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_ClockReference Nucleus Number 1117 Description Generate a 1 kHz signal on pin 7 (INT) of the clock IC User Input None Example DS:> 1117

111700:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_ClockCorrection Nucleus Number 1118 Description Store the clock IC correction value in NVRAM User Input The correction value for the clock Example DS:> 1118 1000023

111800:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_TunerAFCReferenceVoltage Nucleus Number 1119 Description Store the reference voltage for the tuner in NVRAM User Input The reference voltage, between 0 and 255 Example DS:> 1119

5111900:

Test OK @

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_TunerFrequencyDownload Nucleus Number 1120 Description Store the frequency table in NVRAM. The frequency table is passed through the error-

string provided to the nucleus. User Input See frequency table Example DS:> 1120 2233 00 02 4E45442031

112000:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_StoreExternalPresets Nucleus Number 1121 Description Store the external presets in NVRAM User Input None Example DS:> 1121

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_BargraphLevelAdjust Nucleus Number 1122 Description Measure the audio signal corresponding to 0dB per channel and store it as correction

User Input none Example DS:> 1122

112100:

Test OK @

value in NVRAM

112200:

Test OK @

Frequency download string format

Format description remarks

X(XXX) Preset number VVWW VV: Channel numberWW :

Channel offset

Page 63

Diagnostic Software

EN 63DVDR730/0x 5.

ZZ Byte containing 8 bit fields for

TRUE/FALSE : BIT 0: Decoder BIT 1: Modulation BIT 2: NICAM

SAP BIT 3: Satpreset BIT 4: Presetdefined

Channelpreferred BIT 5: ExtPreset BIT 6: NameManuallyChanged BIT 7: ChannelPreset

HH HfSystemFineTuning HfS: 4 bit, FT: -4,...,4 IIJJKKLLMM Netname Range: A,..,Z,0,..,9,_,.. Netname length exists for Europe

The message string of (DS_MessageDef *msgString) should be in the format: “X(XXX)_VVWW_ZZ_HH_IIJJKKLLMM”. Here will be ‘X(XXX)’ a decimal value in the range of 0 to 255. V, W, Z, H, I, J, K, L, M are hex values with out the prefix ‘0x’ (in the range 0... 9,A ... F) “ _” Denotes a space character.

Remarks: CHANNEL_SYSTEM is for NAFTA. PRESET_SYSTEM is for Europe.

System (SYS)

NICAM/stereo bit for Europe SAP/stereo bit for NAFTA

Preset defined bit is only used for Europe. For NAFTA, renamed as channelpreferred to indicate if a channel is preferred or not. TRUE if preset is defined from P50 as extern [TGA]

only. ‘II’ is the HEX-value for the first character, ‘JJ’ for the second, Ö

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_HardwareVersionGet Nucleus Number 1200 Description Get the hardware version and type of the digital board User Input None Example DS:> 1200

120000: Hardware ID = 00 The (PIO-pins) Digital Board ID = 2 Test OK @ DS:>

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SoftwareVersionBootGet Nucleus Number 1201 Description Get the version of the boot software on the digital board User Input None Example DS:> 1201

120100: Software Boot Version = 0001T est OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SoftwareVersionDownloadGet Nucleus Number 1202 Description Get the version of the download software on the digital board User Input None Example DS:> 1202

120200: Software Download Version = 0001 Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SoftwareVersionApplGet Nucleus Number 1203 Description Get the version of the application software on the digital board User Input None Example DS:> 1203

120300: Software Application Version = 0001 Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SoftwareVersionDiagnosticsGet Nucleus Number 1204 Description Get the version of the diagnostics software on the digital board User Input None

Page 64

EN 64 DVDR730/0x5.

Diagnostic Software

Example DS:> 1204

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_EepromUpload Nucleus Number 1205 Description Upload the contents of the NVRAM on the analogue board or the digital board to the

User Input Choose one of the following parameters for the nucleus:1. Upload the contents

Example DS:> 1205

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_EepromDownload Nucleus Number 1206 Description Download a file with the contents of the NVRAM for the analogue board or the digital

User Input Choose one of the following parameters for the nucleus:1. Download the

Example DS:> 1206

120400: Software Diagnostics Version = 0001 Test OK @

service PC, by using the X-modem protocol

of the NVRAM of the digital board2. Upload the contents of the NVRAM of the analogue boardChoose in the terminal on the control PC -> transfer -> receive file. Select X-modem protocol. Then click receive in the dialogue and fill in the file name in which you want to store the data.

120503 Something went wrong while transferring the data. 120504 User cancelled the upload.

1120500: Test OK @

board from the service PC to the recorder, by using the X-modem protocol

contents of the NVRAM of the digital board2. Download the contents of the NVRAM of the analogue boardChoose in the terminal of the control PC -> transfer > send file. Select X-modem protocol. Then choose a file with the Browse button in the dialogue and click on send.

1120600: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_DvIdNumberSet Nucleus Number 1207 Description Set the IEEE 1394 unique IDThe unique ID to be set. User Input None Example DS:> 1207

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_DvIdNumberGet Nucleus Number 1208 Description Get the IEEE1394 ID User Input None Example DS:> 1208

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_IicWrite Nucleus Number 1209 Description Perform an IIC write action on the digital board User Input The user input the number of bytes to write followed by these bytes:

Example DS:> 1209 0 0xa0 1 0x6

1234567890 120700: Test OK @

120800: The DvIdNumber is: 0x0C22384E5A Test OK @

<BusID><Slave address to write to><number of bytes to write><d1><d2><..><dx> Where the bus ID is either 0 (normally used) or 1

120900: 1 Bytes written Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_IicRead Nucleus Number 1210 Description Perform an IIC read action on the digital board User Input The user inputs the number of bytes to read and the address to read them from:

<BusID><Slave address to read from><Number of bytes to read>Where the bus ID is either 0 (normally used) or 1

Page 65

Diagnostic Software

EN 65DVDR730/0x 5.

Example DS:> 1210 0 0xa0 1

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_UartWrite Nucleus Number 1211 Description Perform an UART write action on the digital board on a specified UART User Input The user inputs the UART to write to, the number of bytes and the bytes to be written

Example DS:> 1211 2 2 0xd1 0x01

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_UartRead Nucleus Number 1212 Description Perform an UART read action on the digital board on a specified UART User Input The user inputs the UART to read from.

Example DS:> 1212 2

121000: Value read =0x06T est OK @

to the UART. 1=UART port 1 : not used 2=UART port 2 : Bit Engine 3=UART port 3 : Analogue board <UartNr><Number of bytes to write><d1><d2><..><dx>

121100: Test OK @

1=UART port 1 : not used 2=UART port 2 : Bit Engine 3=UART port 3 : Analogue board <UartNr >

121200: The value that was read is: 0x50 0xD1 0x00 Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_VideoLoopThroughStart Nucleus Number 1213 Description The video signal, which is confirm the user input, is routed from the input to the

output. Input is set with the routing nucleus 1112. All outputs are enabled.

User Input <vipInput> <VideoOutput> <VideoStandard>

Example DS:> 1213 CVBS RGB PAL

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_VideoLoopThroughStop Nucleus Number 1214 Description Stop routing the video input to all the outputs. User Input Example DS:> 1214

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_VideoLoop Nucleus Number 1215 Description Note: Before executing this nucleus the user must route the video signal on the

User Input Video input of the digital board:

1. vipInput (CVBS, YC, YUV, RGB).

2. VideoOutput (YUV, RGB).

3. VideoStandard (PAL, NTSC).

121300: Test OK @

121400: Test OK @

analog board with nucleus DS_ANAB_VideoRouting(1112 ).

- CVBS

- YC

- YUV

- RGB

- TEST (The video output will be routed to the video input on the digital board.) Video standard:

- PAL

- NTSC When no input is given, the nucleus will take TEST for video input and PAL for video standard.

Page 66

EN 66 DVDR730/0x5.

Diagnostic Software

Example DS:> 1215 cvbs ntsc

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_AudioLoop Nucleus Number 1216 Description The user first needs to select how the audio path must be routed on the analogue

User Input None Example DS:> 1216 121600: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SlashVersionSet Nucleus Number 1217 Description Set the slash version of the system User Input The slash version Example DS:> 1217

121500: Test OK @ DS:> 1215 cvbs pal 121508: The VideoInputProcessor cannot detect a sync-signal. Error @ DS:> 1215 yuv ntsc 121511: Error in luminance signal(Y) Error in chrominance signal(U) Error in chrominance signal(V) Error @

board (FRS_DS_ANAB_AUDIO_VIDEO_ROUTING) and/or digital board before calling this nucleus. The user also has to route the audio outputs back to the inputs by means of cables. In this nucleus the Chrysalis generates an audio sine signal with a specific signature and sends it to the output of the digital board (FRS_DS_CHR_SINE). The Chrysalis encodes the audio signal to MPEG I layer II and after this the signature of the signal will be checked.

82121700: Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SlashVersionGet Nucleus Number 1218 Description Get the slash version of the system User Input None Example DS:> 1218

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_Virginize Nucleus Number 1219 Description (Re-) Virginize the recorder. User data in the NVRAM of the analogue board is

Example DS:> 1219

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_VirginModeOn Nucleus Number 1220 Description Turn on the virgin mode functionality (e.g. the auto channel search upon start-up) User Input None Example DS:> 1220

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_VirginModeOff Nucleus Number 1221 Description Turn off the virgin mode functionality (e.g. the auto channel search upon start-up) User Input None Example DS:> 1221

121800: The slash version is: 82 Test OK @

cleared

121900: Test OK @

122000: Test OK @

122100: Test OK @

Page 67

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_DisplayFatalOn Nucleus Number 1223 Description Turn on the display-fatal functionality which displays debug-information on the

display when encountering a fatal error condition from which could not be recovered

automatically User Input None Example DS:> 1223

122300:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_DisplayFatalOff Nucleus Number 1224 Description Turn off the display-fatal functionality which displays debug-information on the

display when encountering a fatal error condition from which could not be recovered

automatically User Input None Example DS:> 1224122400:Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_DisplayFatalGet Nucleus Number 1225 Description Get the display-fatal flag of the recorder User Input None Example DS:> 1225

122500:

Test OK @

EN 67DVDR730/0x 5.

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SettingsSet Nucleus Number 1226 Description Programs the digital board settings into the boot EEPROM on the digital board. User Input A large hexadecimal value that represents the digital board settings obtained from

the DbString.exe program or from a reference set. Example DS:> 1226 646961677473746201010200010101010101000020080000

122600:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SettingsDisplay Nucleus Number 1228 Description Show the settings that are programmed in the BROM on the digital board. User Input None. Example DS:> 1228

Settings ID: 6D7920626F61726400020300010101020101000020080000

Board name: my board

Hardware ID: 0

Codec IC: PNX7100_MF2

Video Input Processor IC: SAA7118

Progressive Scan Deinterlacer IC: None

Progressive Scan Denc IC: ADV7196

I-Link physical layer circuit IC: PDI1394P25

I-Link link layer circuit IC: PDI1394P40

Audio clock: Clock scheme 1

Bit engine connector: available

IDE connector 1: available

IDE connector 2: not available

PCI connector: not available

RAM size 32MByte

ROM size (NOR FLASH bank 1) 8MByte

ROM size (NOR FLASH bank 2) Not available

ROM size (NAND FLASH) Not available

Bit Engine: AV 2.0

122800:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SettingsGet Nucleus Number 1229 Description Get the digital board diversity settings string that is programmed in the BROM on the

digital board. User Input None.

Page 68

EN 68 DVDR730/0x5.

Diagnostic Software

Example DS:> 1229

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_AudioLoopThroughStart Nucleus Number 1230 Description Description: The audio input is routed from the an input to all outputs. Input is set with

User Input None. Example DS:> 1230

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_AudioLoopThroughStop Nucleus Number 1231 Description Stop routing the audio input to all the outputs User Input Example DS:> 1231

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SettingsHwIdSet Nucleus Number 1232 Description Double check whether stored HW-string equals actual HW as far as we can

User Input - ‘manual’ or ‘MANUAL’ to enter manual mode

Example DS:> 1233

122900: 6D7920626F61726400020300010101020101000020080000 Test OK @

the routing nucleus 1113. All outputs are enabled.

123000: Test OK @

123100: Test OK @

automatically detect this. An automatic and a manual mode is supported.

- default is automatic mode where the nucleus stops upon and reports the first encountered error

123300: Test OK @

DS:> 1233 manual 123300: Test OK @

DS:> 1233 123301:Hardware ID mismatch: in HW-Diversity string:99, actual in FLASH:0

Error @

DS:> 1233 manual Hardware ID mismatch! in HW-Diversity string:99, actual in FLASH:0

Enter the correct HW ID of the digital board. > 0 The HW-diversity string has been modified by you. Settings: Board name: DIAG Hardware ID: 0 Codec IC: PNX7100_MF3 Video Input Processor IC: SAA7118 Progressive Scan Deinterlacer IC: None Progressive Scan Denc IC: ADV7196 I-Link physical layer circuit IC: PDI1394P25 I-Link link layer circuit IC: PDI1394P40 Audio clock: Clock scheme 1 Bit engine connector: available IDE connector 1: available IDE connector 2: not available PCI connector: not available RAM size 32MByte ROM size (NOR FLASH bank 1) 8MByte ROM size (NOR FLASH bank 2) Not available ROM size (NAND FLASH) Not available Is it OK to program this inthe new HW-diversity string? ([y]es/[n]o):y Diversity HW-string programmed successfully. 123300: Test OK @

DS:>

Page 69

Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SettingsDoubleCheck Nucleus Number 1233 Description This nucleus sets the HW-Id in the HW-diversity string User Input - <HW-ID> - The hardware ID to set

-No input - The user will be asked for the ID

Example DS:> 1232

Enter the new HW ID of the digital board (Currently equals 21)

Enter a value between 0 and 99:

> 22

The HW ID will be set to: 22. Is that correct? ([Y/N]):y

123200:

Test OK @

DS:> 1232

Enter the new HW ID of the digital board (Currently equals 22)

Enter a value between 0 and 99:

The HW ID will be set to: 0. Is that correct? ([Y/N]):N

123202: Setting the HW ID was aborted by the user.

Error @

DS:> 1232 99

123200:

Test OK @

EN 69DVDR730/0x 5.

Electronic Program Guide Board (EPGB)

Nucleus Name DS_EPGB_VersionGet Nucleus Number 1300 Description Returns the version of the EPG board. User Input None Example DS:> 1300

130000:

Version : 6.1.9

Test OK @

PCMCIA INTERFACE (PCMCIA)

Nucleus Name DS_PCMCIA_Reset Nucleus Number 1400 Description Reset the PCMCIA device by sending a reset command through IDE Example DS:> 1400

Nucleus Name DS_PCMCIA_Inquiry Nucleus Number 1401 Description Get the vendor- and product identification and the product revision level of the media

Example DS:> 1401

140000:

Test OK @

in the slot.

140100:

Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PCMCIA_WriteRead Nucleus Number 1402 Description Perform a Write Read test to a random sector on the inserted medium in the

Example DS:> 1402

Nucleus Name DS_PCMCIA_Diagnostics Nucleus Number 1403 Description Shall perform the internal diagnostic tests implemented by th e PCMCIA slot. The

Example DS:> 1403

PCMCIA device and check if the data read is equal to the data written.

140200:

Test OK @

electronics of the PCMCIA slot are tested here, not the inserted medium.

140300:

Test OK @

Page 70

EN 70 DVDR730/0x5.

HARD DISK DRIVE (HDD)

Nucleus Name DS_HDD_SpinOff Nucleus Number 2110 Description Put the HDD in parking position by sending the sleep command so it can be moved

without endangering the mechanical parts User Input None Error Number Description

210500 The spin off of the hard disk drive device succeeded

210501 The initialisation of IDE failed

210501 The sleep ATA command failed Example DS:> 2105

210500:

Test OK @

Script

Nucleus Name DS_IH_ScriptHandler Nucleus Number Script Description Included tests: 1. DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC

2. DS_DCB_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC

3. DS_BROM_COMMUNICATION_NUC

4. DS_SYS_SETTINGSDISPLAY_NUC

5. DS_CHR_DEVTYPEGET_NUC

6. DS_CHR_INT_PIC_NUC

7. DS_CHR_DMA_NUC

8. DS_BROM_WRITEREAD_NUC

9. DS_NVRAM_COMMUNICATION_NUC

10. DS_NVRAM_WRITEREAD_NUC

11. DS_SDRAM_WRITEREADFAST_NUC

12. DS_FLASH_WRITEREAD_NUC

13. DS_FLASH_CHECKSUMPROGRAM_NUC

14. DS_SYS_HARDWAREVERSIONGET_NUC

15. DS_VIP_DEVTYPEGET_NUC

16. DS_VIP_COMMUNICATION_NUC

17. DS_DVIO_LINKDEVTYPEGET_NUC

18. DS_DVIO_PHYDEVTYPEGET_NUC

19. DS_DVIO_LINKCOMMUNICATION_NUC

20. DS_DVIO_PHYCOMMUNICATION_NUC

21. DS_PSCAN_COMMUNICATIONDENC_NUC

22. DS_PSCAN_COMMUNICATIONDEINTERLACER_NUC

23. DS_BE_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC

24. DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICNVRAM_NUC

25. DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICTUNER_NUC

26. DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICSOUNDPROCESSOR_NUC

27. DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICAVSELECTOR_NUC

28. DS_ANAB_CHECKSUMPROGRAM_NUC

User Input None

Diagnostic Software

Page 71

Diagnostic Software

EN 71DVDR730/0x 5.

Example DS:> script

Executing User/Dealer script. Busy executing NUC1100 1-28 Hello Analogue Board Busy executing NUC1000 2-28 Busy executing NUC200 3-28 Busy executing NUC1228 4-28 Settings ID: 4C4541440D00000000030300010101020101000020080000 Board name: LEAD Hardware ID: 0 Codec IC: PNX7100_MF3 Video Input Processor IC: SAA7118 Progressive Scan Deinterlacer IC: None Progressive Scan Denc IC: ADV7196 I-Link physical layer circuit IC: PDI1394P25 I-Link link layer circuit IC: PDI1394P40 Audio clock: Clock scheme 1 Bit engine connector: available IDE connector 1: available IDE connector 2: not available PCI connector: not available RAM size 32MByte ROM size (NOR FLASH bank 1) 8MByte ROM size (NOR FLASH bank 2) Not available ROM size (NAND FLASH) Not available Bit Engine: AV 2.0 Busy executing NUC100 5-28 Device ID 7100 Codec ID PNX7100_MF3 F-BCU (0x0102) 1.0 INTC (0x011d) 1.0 PCI-XIO(0x0113) 1.0 SIF (0x013b) 1.0 EJTAG (0x0104) 0.0 S-BCU (0x0102) 1.0 BOOT (0x010a) 1.0 CONFIG (0x013f) 1.0 RESET (0x0123) 1.0 DEBUG (0x0116) 0.0 UART0 (0x0107) 0.1 UART1 (0x0107) 0.1 UART2 (0x0107) 0.1 UART3 (0x0107) 0.1 I2C0 (0x0105) 0.1 I2C1 (0x0105) 0.1 GPIO (0x013c) 1.0 SYNC (0x013a) 1.0 DISP0 (0xa015) 0.2 DISP1 (0xa00f) 0.0 OSD (0x0136) 0.1 SPU (0xa00e) 0.0 MIXER (0x0137) 1.0 DENC (0x0138) 0.1 CCIR (0x0139) 1.0 VDEC (0x0133) 0.1 PARSER (0xa00d) 0.0 DV (0xa00c) 0.0 BEI (0xa00a) 0.0 IDE (0xa009) 0.0 SGDX (0xa008) 0.0 BYTE (0xa00b) 0.0 OUTPUT (0xa003) 0.0 ACOMP (0xa000) 0.0 VFE (0xa001) 0.0 VCOMP (0xa002) 0.0 SCR (0x0000) 0.0 SIFF (0xa011) 0.0 WMD (0xa010) 0.0 AUDIO0 (0xa015) 0.2 AUDIO1 (0xa00f) 0.0 PSCAN (0xa018) 0.0 Busy executing NUC114 6-28 Busy executing NUC115 7-28 Busy executing NUC201 8-28 Busy executing NUC300 9-28 Busy executing NUC301 10-28 Busy executing NUC401 11-28 Busy executing NUC501 12-28 Busy executing NUC503 13-28 BootCode checksum is: 0xBABEB432, which is correct Diagnostics checksum is: 0xBABED22B, which is correct Download checksum is: 0xBABE025F, which is correct Application checksum is: 0xBABE2825, which is correct Busy executing NUC1200 14-28 Hardware ID = 00 Busy executing NUC600 15-28 Found SAA7118

Page 72

EN 72 DVDR730/0x5.

Diagnostic Software

Example Busy executing NUC601 16-28

Busy executing NUC700 17-28

Device type of the link layer IC: ffc00301

Busy executing NUC701 18-28

Device type of the phy layer IC: 0

Busy executing NUC702 19-28

Busy executing NUC703 20-28

Busy executing NUC801 21-28

Busy executing NUC808 22-28

The IIC acknowledge was not received, which is correct

Busy executing NUC900 23-28

Busy executing NUC1101 24-28

Busy executing NUC1102 25-28

Busy executing NUC1104 26-28

Busy executing NUC1105 27-28

Busy executing NUC1111 28-28

BootCode checksum is: 0xBABE6240, which is correct

Diagnostics checksum is: 0xBABEDC9A, which is correct

Download checksum is: 0xBABEA6B7, which is correct

Application checksum is: 0xBABE5968, which is correct

PASS

DS:>

Page 73

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

6. Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Overall Block Diagram Digital Board 2.1 Chrysalis

EN 73DVDR730/0x 6.

AUDIO L

FRONT

Analog input

AUDIO R

CVBS

S-VIDEO

CARD READER

GND

+5V

PSU

DVD+RW ENGINE AV3.5

TRAY CONTROL

SERVO

DISC

LASER

READ

WRITE

1922

AFCRI

AFCLI

CFIN

YFIN

CVBSFIN

Digital Video Input

IEEE 1394

1600-1

ATAPI INTERFACE

DIGITAL PCB CHRYSALIS 2.1

1203

1102

PHY

SDRAM

LINK

CHRYSALIS PNX7100 MPEG 2, AC3 CODEC

BOOT EEPROM

ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO

PCI BUS

I2C I2C

USRDATA EEPROM

FLASH

DIG.VIDEO 656

ANALOG VIDEO

DIGITAL AUDIO

UART3: GATEWAY

IRESET_DIG

1104

VIDEO INPUT PROCESSING

VIDEO

EN-

CODER

1901

20 21

4 2

1904

1900

A_WCLK

A_BCLK

D_DATAO

A_WCLK

A_BCLK

DAOUT

F4709

CVBS_Y_IN

A_DATA

DAOUT

MUTEN

D_PCMCLK

ANALOG BOARD

1942

AFCRI

AFCLI

CVBSFIN

8SW

CFIN

YFIN

CVBS-RGB-Y/C

V_IN

U_IN

Y_IN

C_IN

AE_xCLK

AUDIO ENCODER I2S

AD_ACLK

AD_xCLK

AUDIO PCM I2S

UP SUB BOARD

P50

CLOCK & BACKUP

CONTROL uP

1986

1980

I2C, INT IPOR

1947

CVBS_OUT_B

Y_OUT_B

C_OUT_B

V_OUT_B

Y1_OUT_B

U_OUT_B

1900

1987

1984

ION

F4712

F4714

F4716

F4718

F4720

F4722

ADC

DAC

STBY

INTELLIGENT CONTROL

INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSING & SOURCE SELECTION

FAN

AUDIO L/R

SCART II AUXI/O

SCARTI TO TV

- I/O

S-VIDEO

CVBS

+5V

GND

+12V

1600-2

56 55 54

PSU

DISPLAY & CONTROL

INFRA RED EYE

A_YCVBS F4709 D_CVBS F4712

A: DC, 500mV/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div

FRONT PROCESSOR

D_Y F4714

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

+3V3

GND

+12V

124

1234567

PSU

GND

ION

+5V

8191011

A: DC, 200mV/Div

-5V

GND

1500

D_C F4716

10us/Div

+12Vstby

-Vgnstby

SDA

INT

POR_DC

5STBY

42853910

POWER OPEN/CLOSE PLAY STOP RECORD

RS232

SCL

1910

A: DC, 200mV/Div

SERVICE

D_R F4718

10us/Div

1103

D_G F4720

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

1704

D_B F4722

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

CARD

READER

ENGINE

PSU

IPOR_DC

I2C, INT3

IPOR, INT

I2C

ION

STBY

1943

GND

+5V

1935

MULTI-MODE SOPS

+5V

GND

+12V

+3V3

GND

+12V

GND

-5V

+5V

GND

1934

1234567

1932

DIGITAL PCB

9 1011128

1946

1920

AD_WCLK; AE_WCLK AD_BCLK; AE_BCLK

2V / div AC 10us / div

2V / div AC 200ns / div

TUNER

IO EXTENSION BOARD

DAOUT

AD_ACLK

2V / div AC 50ns / div

ANTENNA INPUT

TV OUT

MAINS AC

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUT / PROGRESSIVE

SCAN

AUDIO DIGITAL

AUDIO OPTICAL

E_14230_001

130904

Page 74

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

EN 74DVDR730/0x 6.

Control Block Diagram Analog Board, uP Board

DVIO-Board Digital Board Basic Engine

DVIO BE

I2S

FBIN

I2C

SWITCH

5SW

A_DATA D_DATA

A_RDY

D_RDY

IRESET_DIG

int. RAM int. ROM

I2C_SW

ext. Latch ext. RAM ext. Flash

P-Subprint

LEVELSW

I2C

Level

Shifter

I2C 5V

INT, IPOR_DC

I2C 3,3V

Digital Board

A0-A7 A0-A7 WE

AD0-AD7

A8-A16

Central-P

TMP91CW12AF (3,3V Supply)

FBIN

AD0-AD7

A8-A19

BE_FAN

KILL

Fan

Control

only

IPOR

IPFAIL

AKILL

P50

P50in P50out

Fan_off

INT

Reset

FOME

Analog Board

I2S

IPFAIL

ADC/DAC

(UDA1334BTS

UDA1361TS)

PWONSW

I2C_SW

Frontend

Video

SIF1

PSS SB1 SFS_TS AFC AGC

I2C_SW

Frontend

Audio

(MSP)

I2C_SW

DataSlicer

(STV5348)

Sense 3V3STBY

Reset-IC

EEPROM (M24C16)

I2C

Display Control Board

I2C_SW (for NAFTA only)

I2C

( for EUROPE

only)

I2C

INT

IPOR_DC

WU WSFI

FBIN P50 8SC2

Video

(STV6618)

VSA1 VSA2

ASC1S

For EUROPE only

Front P

TMP87CH74F

RSA1 RSA2

STBY

Audio

ASC1M for EUROPE only

ION 2

(HEF IC’S)

AKILL

Follow Me

Power Supply

Display

TR 01019_001 130502

Page 75

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

: ,

Wiring Diagram

SET-FAN

IOE

(1005)

8012 .... 3103 601 0047.

DVDR 80 EUROPE

DVDR 80 DVDR 75 APAC

DVDR 80

GNDA

DAINOPT

DAINCOAX

DAOUT

GNDD

GLINK_RXD GLINK_TXD

IR_OUT

EN 75DVDR730/0x 6.

1mm

GNDD

6 5

1921

N.C.

4 3

1920

GND

3 2

1923

8029 .... 3103 601 0032.

8026 .... 3103 601 0043.

8010 .... 3103 601 0028.

8011 .... 3103 601 0029.

1943

GND

1mm

VGNSTBY

TEMP_SENSE

N.C.

DAOUT

INT

GND

5VSTBY

POR_DC

12VSTBY

N.C.

GND

D_IKILL

D_PCMCLK

1951

SDA

D_DATA0

SCL

D_WCLK

2,5 mm

1901

8004 .... 3103 601 0022.

GND

A_DAT

D_BCLK

A_PCMCLK

1 2 3 4

5 6

1986

7 8 9

1 2

1mm

A_BCLK

A_WCLK

FBIN BE_FAN WE N.C. D_RDY A_RDY

D_DATA

A_DATA IRESET_DIG

MOT GNDD BE_FAN

1900

GND

1mm

1946

GND

GNDUGND

8002 .... 3103 601 0020.

2mm

1935

GND

1944

1949

1941

1948

GND

12V

GND

1934

2,5 mm

8005 .... 3103 601 0023.

1mm

D_B

F4722

D_G

D_R

GND

F4716

F4718

F4720

F4709

D_Y

D_C

GND

D_CVBS

A_YCVBS

F4712

F4714

AINFR

1947

A_B

A_R

A_C

A_G

GND

2mm

JST-KR

1942

N.C.

GND

YFIN

CFINI

AINFL

CVBSFIN

1932

TUNER

3V3

SPLITTER

3V3

ANALOG BOARD

(1001)

ION

12V

GND

2mm

JST-KR

8021 .... 3103 601 0038.

8013 .... 3103 601 0031.

8028 .... 3103 601 0048.

8016 .... 3103 601 0033.

8015 .... 3103 601 0032.

8006 .... 3103 601 0049.

8027 .... 3103 601 0045.

GNDD

AD_ACLK

MUTEN

** +3V3

1mm

GNDD

DAC-B

N.C.

GNDD

AD_SPDIF33

GNDD

DAC-C

1900

GNDD

DAC-A/Y

110 4

1mm

T1_TX

T1_RX

IRESET_DIG

VSM_UAR

T1_CTSn

VSM_UAR T1_RTSn

VSM_UAR

ION

BE_FAN

ANA_WE

VIP_FB

GNDD

G_OUT_B

JP1

GNDD

C_OUT_B

R_OUT_B

PCMCIA

(1008)

GNDD

1mm

1953

GND

GNDD

Y_OUT_B

GNDUGND

GNDD

CVBS_Y_IN

CVBS_OUT_B

GNDD

GND

1951

V_IN

U_IN

Y_IN

C_IN

GNDD

1mm

1941

1940

1mm

1970

GND

GLINK_RXD_CHAS

D_B

D_G

GND

POR_DC

12VSTBY

VGNSTBY

TEMP_SENSE

1mm

POR_DC

VGNSTBY

TEMP_SENSE

IR_OUT_CHAS

GLINK_TXD_CHAS

D_C

D_R

D_Y

GND

INT

GND

SDA

GND

5VSTBY

EPG

(1006)

INT

GND

5VSTBY

12VSTBY

SDA

GND

SCL

GND

D_CVBS

SCL

GND

A_YCVBS

1mm

Y_IN

U_IN

V_IN

GNDD

C_IN

GNDD

CVBS_Y_IN

CVBS_OUT_B

DIGITAL BOARD

(1002)

GNDD

Y_OUT_B

C_OUT_B

GNDD

B_OUT_B

R_OUT_B

G_OUT_B

BCLK_CTL_SERVICE

1102

910

13 14

15 16

19 20

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

31 32

33 34

35 36

37 38

39 40

1904

CTS1P GNDD RTS1P

RX1P

TX1P

GNDD

GNDD GNDD

GNDD

+3V3 +3V3 +3V3 +3V3

SERVICE

+5V

JST-KRJST-KR

2mm

1103

-5V

ION

+5V

N.C.

8008 .... 3103 601 0044.

1500

1mm

1950

A_C

GND

GNDUGND

GND

1mm

1952

A_G

A_B

GND

A_R

GND

B_OUT_B

GND

3738

3536

3334

3132

2526

1920

1112

1704

N.C.

** +5V

1200

4-pol PC-connector

+5V

GND

+12V

BASIC ENGINE

(1007)

910

11 1 2

13 14

40-pol IDE-Connector

25 26

15 16

19 20

27 28

29 30

31 32

37 38

39 40

8020 .... 3103 601 0037.

1mm

1901

GNDD

1mm

AE_BCLK

AE_WCLK

N.C.

GNDD

DAINOPT

GNDD

AE_DATA1

DAOUT

DAINCOAX

GNDD

AE_ACLK

GNDD

AD_BCLK

AD_WCLK

AD_DATA0

8019 .... 3103 601 0036.

HCON2

8017 .... 3103 601 0034.

A_YCVBS F4709

DC, 500mV/Div

TRAY_LED2

+12VSTBY

KEYPRINT

1941

JST DA

2mm

D_CVBS F4712

A: DC

, 200mV/Div

8024 .... 3103 601 0018.

D_Y F4714

A: DC, 200mV/Div

JST DA

1950

+12VSTBY

TRAY_LED2

D_C F4716

A: DC, 200mV/Div

8009 .... 3103 601 0046.

CONTROL-PANEL

(1004)

AFCRI_FC

2000-05-080

2000-03-100

3UH000

2000-02-070

99-12-200

99-09-290

D_R F4718 D_G F4720

1922

A: DC, 200mV/Div

AFCLI_FC

GND_FC

CVBSFIN_FC

8SW_FC

GND_FC

1mm

1910

SCL

SDA

GND

5VSTBY

YFIN_FC

GND_FC

CFIN_FC

2mm

JST-KR

A: DC, 200mV/Div

INT

POR_DC

12VSTBY

VGNSTBY

TEMP_SENSE

D_B F4722

18CYNIBURK

A: DC, 200mV/Div

FFC-Cable Cable Tree assy FFC-Cable only for DVDR 77

130 210

110 1

DV IN

TR 13001_001

200803

Page 76

Waveforms

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Waveforms Display Board

EN 76DVDR730/0x 6.

Waveforms Analog Board

7106/7108-Emitter

A: DC, 2 V/Div, 10us/Div

I324 VSource (Standby)

A: DC, 50mV/Div 5us/Div

A_CVBS I405

IC7103-19

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 10us/Div

I324 VSource (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 50mV/Div 2us/Div

D_CVBS F4712

IC7103-8

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 100ns/Div

F723 VFV I723

A: DC

, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

D_Y F4714

F327 VDrain (Standby)

A: DC, 100V/Div 5us/Div

E465

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_C F4716

F327 VDrain (no disc loaded)

DC, 100V/Div

A: 2us/Div

E461

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_R F4718

I324 VGate (Standby)

A: DC, 1V/Div 5us/Div

E462

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_G F4720

I324 VGate (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 2V/Div 2us/Div

E463

A: DC

, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

D_B F4722

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

I502/I504

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

A_CVBS F8008

A: DC, 500mV/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

I517/I518

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

I818

A: DC, 1 V/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

F501/F502

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

I994

A: DC, 1 V/Div

20ns/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

I014/I032

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

I989

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

ARDAC/ALDAC F010/F011

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

I623

A: DC, 1 V/Div 500us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

SYNC F843

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

TR 070018_001

200303

Page 77

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

EN 77DVDR730/0x 6.

Waveforms Digital Board Chrysalis 2.1

IC7703 pin 34

A: DC, 200mV/Div, 5us/Div

IC7402 pin 3, F405

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 50ns/Div

IC7703 pin 36

A: DC, 200mV/Div, 5us/Div

IC7200 pin 60, F203

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div

HS_IN

A: DC, 2 V/Div, 10us/Div

X1001

A: DC, 500mV/Div, 2us/Div

Y 1704-2

A: DC, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

A_YCVBS 1904-14

A: DC, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

PB 1704-4

A: DC, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

D_YCVBS 1904-11

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

PR 1704-6

A: DC, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

D_Y 1904-9

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

IC7501 pin 5

A: DC, 2 V/Div, 1us/Div

VS_IN

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 5ms/Div

IC7501 pin 6

A: DC, 2 V/Div, 1us/Div

1704-2, F1702

A: DC, 500mV/Div, 5us/Div

IC7703 pin 25

A: DC, 2 V/Div, 10ns/Div

IC7703 pin 32

A: DC, 200mV/Div, 5us/Div

D_C 1904-7

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_UB 1904-1

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_VR 1904-5

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

D_YG 1904-3

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

TR 09014_001

220403

Page 78

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

2us/Div

Test points overview Analog Board

EN 78DVDR730/0x 6.

F0001 A10 F0002 C10 F0003 C10 F0005 C10 F0007 C10 F0009 C10 F0010 C9 F0011 C10 F0012 C10 F0014 C10 F0016 C10 F0021 A10 F006 C9 F007 C8 F008 C9 F009 C9 F010 A10 F011 B10 F300 A3

F301 A3 F302 A4 F304 B1 F305 B2 F306 A1 F307 B1 F308 A2 F309 A2 F310 A2 F311 A2 F312 B1 F313 A1 F314 A1 F315 C1 F316 C2 F317 C4 F318 C2 F319 C2 F320 C1

F321 C3 F322 C4 F323 B1 F324 B3 F325 A9 F326 B2 F328 B1 F329 B1 F331 A3 F333 A3 F334 A2 F335 A2 F336 A2 F337 A2 F338 B1 F339 B1 F340 A2 F341 B3 F342 C1

F343 A2 F344 C9 F346 A2 F347 C8 F348 C8 F349 C3 F350 C3 F351 A3 F352 C8 F353 C8 F354 A2 F355 C3 F356 C3 F357 C3 F358 C6 F359 C8 F360 C3 F361 C2 F362 A2

F363 A2 F364 A3 F366 B2 F367 B2 F368 B2 F369 B2 F371 A3 F372 A3 F373 B3 F374 B3 F381 C8 F382 C9 F383 C8 F384 C8 F401 A9 F4102 A9 F4103 A9 F412 A8 F4203 C5

F4205 C6 F4207 C6 F4209 C6 F4210 B5 F4505 A9 F4707 A6 F4712 B6 F4714 B6 F4716 B6 F4718 B6 F4720 B6 F4721 A6 F4722 B6 F485 A6 F499 A4 F501 A7 F502 A7 F504 A3 F5101 A5

F5102 A5 F5103 A5 F5106 A5 F5108 A5 F5110 A5 F5113 A4 F5116 A5 F5119 A4 F5120 A4 F5201 A5 F5202 A5 F5203 A5 F5206 A5 F5207 A5 F5208 A5 F5210 A5 F5211 A5 F5213 A4 F5215 A5

F5216 C8 F5219 A4 F5220 A4 F6001 C6 F6002 C10 F6004 C6 F701 A3 F702 B4 F703 A3 F704 A3 F707 A3 F708 B5 F709 B4 F710 B3 F713 C7 F913 B5 F950 C9 I001 C10 I002 B10

I004 C10 I005 B10 I006 B9 I007 B10 I008 B9 I009 B9 I013 B9 I014 B10 I015 B9 I018 B10 I019 B10 I020 A9 I021 B9 I022 C9 I023 B10 I029 C10 I030 B9 I031 C10 I032 B10

I036 A9 I300 A1 I301 A3 I303 B2 I304 B3 I305 B3 I306 A1 I307 C1 I308 B2 I309 B3 I310 C2 I311 B1 I312 B1 I313 B3 I314 A1 I315 B3 I316 A1 I317 A1 I318 C3

I319 C3 I320 C3 I321 B1 I322 B1 I323 A3 I324 B1 I325 B1 I326 A2 I327 B2 I329 A2 I330 C1 I331 C1 I332 B2 I333 A3 I334 A2 I335 C1 I336 B2 I337 A3 I338 A3

I339 A2 I340 C1 I341 A5 I342 A2 I343 C1 I344 C2 I345 A2 I346 A3 I347 B7 I348 C1 I349 B7 I350 C2 I351 C2 I352 B7 I353 A3 I354 A3 I355 C2 I356 A2 I357 A2

I361 A2 I402 A6 I405 A10 I406 A4 I407 A4 I408 A4 I409 A4 I411 B6 I412 B6 I413 C5 I414 A5 I415 C6 I416 B5 I417 B5 I418 C4 I419 C9 I420 C9 I424 A4 I428 A7

I429 A9 I431 A7 I433 A7 I434 A7 I437 A6 I438 B6 I439 A6 I440 A6 I441 A6 I442 B7 I443 A7 I444 A6 I445 A6 I446 B6 I447 B6 I448 A7 I449 A6 I451 A6 I453 A9

I454 A9 I456 B6 I457 B5 I458 A5 I459 A5 I460 A5 I461 A4 I462 A4 I463 A4 I464 A4 I465 A4 I466 B5 I467 A6 I468 B6 I469 B5 I470 B5 I476 A5 I478 B6 I479 B5

I481 B6 I482 B6 I483 B5 I484 A5 I485 A7 I486 A6 I487 A9 I488 A9 I489 A9 I490 A10 I491 A10 I492 A9 I493 A9 I501 A8 I502 B8 I503 A8 I504 B8 I505 C5 I506 B5

I507 A9 I508 A7 I509 A8 I510 A8 I511 A8 I513 B7 I514 C6 I515 B7 I516 B7 I517 B8 I518 B8 I519 A8 I520 A8 I521 A4 I523 A7 I524 A7 I525 B9 I526 B9 I527 B6

I611 B7 I612 B7 I613 C7 I614 B7 I615 B7 I616 B7 I617 B7 I620 B6 I621 B6 I623 B6 I624 B7 I625 B7 I630 C6 I631 C6 I701 A3 I702 B4 I703 B4 I704 B4 I706 B3

I528 B7 I529 A8 I530 A8 I531 A8 I532 A7 I533 A8 I534 A7 I535 A7 I539 A8 I540 A8 I601 B6 I602 C8 I603 B6 I604 B6 I605 B7 I607 B4 I608 C7 I609 B6 I610 B7

I707 B4 I708 B4 I709 B4 I711 C4 I712 B4 I713 C4 I715 A9 I716 A10 I717 B4 I721 C4 I723 C7 I724 C5 I725 C5 I726 B4 I727 B4 I728 B4 I729 B4 I730 B4 I731 C4

I732 A3 I733 A3 I734 A3 I735 A3 I739 B4 I741 B3 I742 B3 I743 B4 I744 B4 I745 B4 I746 B4 I748 B4 I749 C4 I751 C5 I754 C4 I951 C9 I952 B9 I954 B9 I955 B9

I956 B9 I957 B9 I958 B9 I959 B9 I987 A10 I988 A10 I989 A10 I990 A10 I991 A10 I992 A10 I993 A10 I994 A10 I995 A10 I996 A9 I997 A10 I998 A10 I999 A10

D_R F4718

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

ARDAC/ALDAC F010/F011

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

A_CVBS I405

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

I502/I504

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

A_CVBS F8008

D_G F4720

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

I623

A: DC, 1 V/Div 500us/Div

D_CVBS F4712

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

I517/I518

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

I818

D_B F4722

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

SYNC F843

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_Y F4714

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

F501/F502

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

I994

F327 VDrain (Standby)

A: DC, 100V/Div 5us/Div

F327 VDrain (no disc loaded)

C, 100V/Di

: D

s/Div

I324 VGate (Standby)

A: DC, 1V/Div 5us/Div

I324 VGate (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 2V/Div 2us/Div

I324 VSource (Standby)

A: DC, 50mV/Div 5us/Div

I324 VSource (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 50mV/Div

F723 VFV I723

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

E465

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

E461

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

E462

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

TR 07002_001

200303

E463

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

D_C F4716

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

A: DC, 1 V/Div 20us/Div

I014/I032

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

A: DC, 1 V/Div

20ns/Div

I989

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

Page 79

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Test points overview UP Sub Board

EN 79DVDR730/0x 6.

F8001 C3 F8002 C3 F8003 C3 F8004 C3 F8005 C3 F8006 C3 F8007 C2 F8008 C2 F801 A3 F802 A2 F803 A1 F804 B3 F805 B3 F807 B3 F812 C2 F813 C2 F814 C2 F815 C2 F816 C2 F817 C1 F818 C1 F819 A3 F820 B3 F821 A3 F822 B3 F823 A3 F824 B3 F825 A3 F826 A3 F827 A2 F828 A2 F829 A2 F830 A2

F831 C1 F832 A2 F833 C1 F834 A1 F835 C1 F836 C1 F837 A2 F838 A2 F839 C2 F840 A2 F8401 A2 F8402 A2 F8403 A2 F8406 A2 F8407 A1 F841 C2 F842 C2 F843 B1 F844 A2 F845 A2 F846 A1 F847 B1 F848 A3 F849 A3 F850 B3 F851 B3 F852 C2 F8603 C1 F8604 A3 F8606 C3 F8607 C3 F8608 C3

F8609 C3

F8610 C3 F8701 A1 F8702 A3 F8703 A3 F8704 A3 F8705 A3 F8706 A3 F8707 A3 F8708 A3 F8802 C2 F8803 C2 F8804 C2 F8805 C2 F8806 C2 F8807 C2 F8808 C1 F901 A1 F902 A3 F903 A1 F904 A1 F905 A2 F906 A1 F907 B1 F908 A1 F909 B1 F910 B1 I801 C2 I802 C3 I803 C2 I804 B2 I805 A3 I806 A3

I807 A3

I808 A3 I809 C1 I810 B3 I811 A3 I812 A2 I813 A1 I814 B3 I815 A3 I816 A1 I817 C1 I818 B1 I819 C1 I820 C1 I821 B3 I822 B3 I823 A2 I824 A2 I825 C2 I903 B1 I904 B1 I905 B1 I906 B1 I907 C1 I908 B1

TR 06058_001

250203

Page 80

Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Test points overview Digital Board

EN 80DVDR730/0x 6.

TR 19001_001

250504

F0001 C1 F0003 C1 F0005 C1 F0007 D1 F0009 D1 F001 A1 F0011 D1 F0015 D1 F002 B1 F003 B2 F004 B2 F005 B2 F006 B2 F007 B2 F008 B1 F009 B2 F010 B1 F011 C1 F012 B1 F013 B2 F014 A2 F015 B2 F016 B1 F017 B2 F018 B2 F019 B1 F0201 C1 F0202 A1 F0203 C1 F0204 C1 F0205 C1 F0206 C1 F0207 C1 F0208 C1 F0209 C1 F0210 C1 F0211 C1 F0212 C1 F0213 C1 F0214 C1 F0215 C1 F0216 C1 F0217 C1 F0218 D1 F0221 D1 F0223 D1 F0225 D1 F0227 D1 F0229 D1 F0231 D1 F0233 D1 F0234 D1 F0235 D1 F0236 D1 F0237 D1

F0238 D1 F0239 D1 F0301 A1 F0302 A1 F0303 A1 F0304 B1 F0305 C1 F0306 B1 F0307 B1 F0401 A2 F0402 A2 F0403 A2 F0404 A2 F0405 B1 F0406 C3 F0407 C3 F0408 A2 F0409 C3 F0410 B3 F0501 A1 F0503 C1 F0506 C1 F0508 C1 F0509 C1 F0510 C1 F0511 C1 F0512 C1 F0514 C1 F0601 B1 F0603 B1 F1201 A3 F1202 A3 F1203 B1 F1204 A3 F1205 A3 F1401 C3 F1402 C3 F1403 C3 F1405 C3 F1407 C3 F1409 C3 F1411 B3 F1413 C3 F1415 C3 F1417 C3 F1419 C3 F1421 C3 F1423 C3 F1425 C3 F1427 C3 F1501 B1 F1502 B1 F1505 A3 F1506 B1 F1509 C1

F1510 B1 F1512 A1 F1701 D1 F1702 A2 F1704 A2 F1706 A2 F1902 A2 F1903 A2 F1904 A2 F1907 A2 F1909 A3 F1911 A3 F1912 A3 F1914 A3 F1916 A3 F1918 A3 F1920 A3 F1921 A3 F1922 D1 F200 B3 F201 A3 F203 A3 F204 B3 F205 C2 F206 B3 F207 B2 F208 B2 F209 B2 F210 B3 F211 B3 F212 B3 F213 B3 F214 C2 F215 C2 F216 B3 F217 B3 F400 D2 F401 D2 F402 C2 F403 C3 F404 C3 F405 C3 F406 C3 F500 C1 F501 C1 F502 C1 F936 B3 I001 A1 I002 A1 I003 B2 I004 A1 I005 A1 I006 B1 I007 B1 I008 B1

I009 A1 I010 A1 I011 A1 I012 A2 I013 B2 I014 B1 I015 C1 I100 B2 I102 C3 I103 D2 I104 D2 I105 D1 I106 C2 I108 B3 I109 A2 I110 B3 I111 A2 I112 B3 I114 B3 I115 D2 I116 D1 I117 B1 I119 B3 I120 B3 I121 B3 I122 B3 I123 B3 I124 B3 I200 B2 I201 A3 I202 A3 I203 A3 I204 A2 I205 D3 I206 B2 I207 A3 I208 A3 I209 A3 I210 A3 I211 A3 I212 B3 I213 B3 I214 A3 I215 A3 I216 B3 I217 A3 I218 B3 I219 B3 I220 A2 I221 A2 I222 A3 I223 A2 I224 A2 I225 B3 I226 B3

I227 B3 I300 B3 I301 B3 I302 B3 I303 C3 I304 B3 I305 B3 I306 B3 I400 C3 I401 C3 I402 B2 I403 C3 I404 D3 I405 D2 I406 C2 I407 D3 I408 D3 I409 D3 I410 D3 I411 D3 I412 D3 I413 D2 I414 C3 I415 D3 I416 C3 I417 C2 I418 D2 I419 D2 I420 D2 I421 C2 I422 D2 I423 C2 I424 C2 I425 C2 I426 C2 I427 C2 I428 C2 I429 C2 I430 C2 I431 C2 I432 C2 I433 D2 I434 D1 I435 D1 I436 C2 I437 C2 I438 D2 I439 D2 I440 D3 I441 C3 I441 C4 I500 D1 I501 A1 I502 C1 I503 D1

I504 C1 I505 C1 I506 C1 I507 D1 I508 B1 I509 B1 I510 B3 I511 B1 I512 B1 I700 A2 I701 A2 I703 B2 I704 B2 I705 B2 I706 B2 I707 B2 I708 B2 I709 B2 I710 B2 I711 B2 I7119 A2 I712 B2 I713 A2 I714 A2 I715 A2 I716 A2 I717 A2 I718 A2 I720 A2 I721 A2 I722 A2 I723 A2 I724 A2 I725 A2 I726 A2 I727 A2 I728 A2 I729 A2 I730 B2 I731 B2 I732 B2 I733 B2 I734 B2 I735 B3 I736 B3 I737 B2 I738 A2 I739 B2 I740 B2 I742 A2 I743 A2 I743 A5 I744 A2 I744 A5 I745 A2

I745 A5 I746 A2 I746 A5 I800 D2 I801 D2 I802 D3 I803 D2 I804 D2 I805 C2 I806 D1 I900 A1 I901 A1 I902 A1 I903 A1 I904 A1 I905 A1 I906 A1 I907 A1 I908 A1 I909 A3 I910 A1 I911 A1 I912 A1 I913 A1 I914 A1 I915 A1 I916 A1 I917 A1 I918 A2 I919 A1 I920 A1 I921 B2 I922 A1 I923 A1 I924 A1 I925 A1 I926 A1 I927 A1 I928 A2 I929 B1 I930 A1 I931 B1 I932 A1 I933 B1 I934 A1 I935 A1 I936 A1 I937 A1 I938 A1 I939 A1 I940 B2 I940 B5 I943 A1 I943 A6 I944 A1 I944 A6

Page 81

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

7. Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Display Panel

EN 81DVDR730/0x 7.

12345

FIL1

I177

0803

BARCODE

7100

BJ900GNK

3141

0206

HOLDER FTD ASSY

0005

PROTECTION FOIL

+5VSTBY

7112

PDTA124EU

47K

0.1V

+12VSTBY

6101

LTL-1MHHR

0210

LIGHT CHAMBER RECORD

I182

6102

RECORD

I183

6103

I190

3137

I192

3139

I194

7105

BC847BW

LTL-1MHHR

270R

7.5V

0.1V

GND

+5VSTBY

VKK

47K

3108

I166

EVQ11L05R

OPEN/CLOSE

GND

I157

3114

100R

+5VSTBY

GND

VGNSTBY

GND

3107

2103

9101

2115

I173

2K2

10n

BZX384-C6V8

47n

6111

BAS316

3134

F1401

-T

F1503

F1504

F1404

F1407

2322640

F1402

GND

1910

GND

5VSTBY

GND

SDA SCL

1911

1 2 3 4

F1405

5 6 7 8 9

FMN

GND

TEMP_SENSE

VGNSTBY

POR_DC

12VSTBY

from/to Analogboard

to STBY-PRINT

5101

5103

INTINT

GND

10K

GND

F102

6.3V

2127

470u

not used

should be ZL type

7104 BC847BW

+5VSTBY

1166

3130

I168

IPOR

3115

100R

10K

EVQ11L05R

F103

F104

VGNSTBY

F1403

+12VSTBY

F1408

F1409

F1410

2105

GND

3111

22K

5105

not used

100u

not used

9102

GND

I174

I167

1168

GND

3110

10K

3144

220R

EVQ11L05R

1170

123456789 111213

6789101112

P27

P26

P25

6P27P38P49P510P611P712P813

3113

INT

1K0

FIL2

22u

2117

3123

470R

GND

6100

50V

3122

3119

I158

10K

GND

3106

I179

1165

GND

P24

FIL1

P23

P22

2110

5104

100u

470R

47K

1167

REC

EVQ11L05R

GND

3103

I172

P21

10u

GND

220R

EVQ11L05R

P18

P17

P20

P16

P19

P1015P1116P1217P1318P1419P1520P1621P17

I156

+12VSTBY

3116

330R

47n

2111

7106

BC337-25

5.4V

2113

I159

680n

7108

BC327-25

GND

10K

3104

I171

1169

STOP

PLAY

EVQ11L05R

GND

P15

I160

+5VSTBY

3102

2100

GND

P1P2P3P4P5

P14

I161

3125 470R

5.4V

2K2

10n

3118

I162

330R

GND

I147

7109

BC847BW

22 23 24 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 411

P18

GND

0.4V

3124

GND

P7P8P9

P10

P11

P12

P13

G2G3G4G5G6

25G126G227

G328G429G530G631G732G833G9

2109

22p

OPTION

2108

22p

OPTION

IPOR

3120

1K0

2114

I163

1n0

10K

TSOP4836ZC1

8M0

7107

OUT

GND

I150

1110

EFOMC

I151

GND GND

+5VSTBY

10K

3117

3126 100R

220n

2112

GND

4.8V

GND

+5VSTBY

3121

2116

GND

I165

220R

I143

22u

GND

1K0

3112

+5VSTBY

3132

3133

GND

1.9V

2.1V

I144

1K0

I137

1K0

not used

2101

2102

47n

22u

16V

RESET

TEST

SCK1

79 80

SI1

SO1

2 3 4 5 6

INT0

INT1

TC2 PPG

DVO TC4

PDO PWM

I142

INT3 TC1

INT2

INT4 TC3

INT5 STOP

XTIN

XTOUT

SCL SI0

SDA SO0

SCK0

XTAL

P0<0:7>

P1<0:7>

P2<0:2>

P3<0:2>

AIN

P4<0:7>

AIN

P5<0:3>

+5VSTBY

5100

G7G1G9

10u

VAREF

TMP87CH74F

FIL2

I178

VKK

50V

100n

VDD

VKK

PD<0:4>

P6<0:7>

P7<0:7>

P8<0:7>

P9<0:7>

2104

GND

I104

I103

I102

I101

I100

I136

I135

I134

I133

I132

I131

I130

I129

I128

I127

I126

I125

I124

I123

I122

I121

I120

I119

I118

I117

I116

I115

I114

I113

I112

I111

I110

I109

I108

I107

I106

I105

7103

VSS

VASS

GND

P23 P24 P25 P26 P27

V0 V2

G8_9

G7 G6 G5 G4 G3

G1 P13 P12

P9 P11 P10

P1 P14

P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22

13 14

+5VSTBY

7101

BC847BW

I176

-24V

3100

100p

2123

G8_9

G6 G5 G4 G3

G2 G1

VKK

+5VSTBY

7102

BC847BW

-24V

I175

3101

2124

100p

VKK

4100

not used

22K

4101

not used

22K

2118

100p

2119

100p

2120

100p

2121

100p

2122

100p

2125

100p

2126

100p

-23.9V

3147

3148

3149

3150

3151

3152

3153

6105

BAS316

3127

100K

VKK

6106

BAS316

3128

100K

VKK

22K

TR 13002_001

200803

0005 B4 0206 B4 0210 C1 0803 A1 1110 D9 1165 I6 1166 I4 1167 I6 1168 I4 1169 I7 1170 I5 1910 G1 1911 H1

2100 I7 2101 D10 2102 D10 2103 I5 2104 D11 2105 G3 2108 D9 2109 C9 2110 E6 2111 E7 2112 E9 2113 F7

2114 F9 2115 F5 2116 G9 2117 F6 2118 E13 2119 F13 2120 F13 2121 F13 2122 F13 2123 C13 2124 D13 2125 G13

2126 G13 2127 H3 3100 C13 3101 D13 3102 H7 3103 I6 3104 I7 3106 I6 3107 H5 3108 I5 3110 I4

3111 G3 3112 G10 3113 E6 3114 H5 3115 H4 3116 E7 3117 E9 3118 E8 3119 F6 3120 F9 3121 F9 3122 F6

3123 F6 3124 F8 3125 E8 3126 E9 3127 C14 3128 D14 3130 I4 3132 H10 3133 H10 3134 F2 3137 D3 3139 D3

3141 E3 3144 F4 3147 E14 3148 F14 3149 F14 3150 F14 3151 G14 3152 G14 3153 G14 4100 C13 4101 D13

5100 D10 5101 G2 5103 G2 5104 F6 5105 G3 6100 F6 6101 B3 6102 C3 6103 C3 6105 B14 6106 C14 6111 F4

7100 A5 7101 B13 7102 D13 7103 E11 7104 G4 7105 E3 7106 E7 7107 F9 7108 F7 7109 E8 7112 D4 9101 F5

F102 G4 F103 G2 F104 G2 F1401 F1 F1402 G2 F1403 G3 F1404 G1 F1405 G1 F1407 H1

F1408 G2 F1409 H2 F1410 H2 F1503 H1 F1504 I1 I100 E12 I101 E12 I102 E12 I103 E12 I104 E12 I105 I12 I106 H12 I107 H12 I108 H12 I109 H12 I110 H12 I111 H12 I112 H12 I113 H12 I114 H12 I115 H12 I116 H12 I117 G12 I118 G12 I119 G12 I120 G12 I121 G12 I122 G12 I123 G12 I124 G12 I125 G12 I126 G12 I127 G12 I128 F12 I129 F12 I130 F12 I131 F12 I132 F12 I133 F12 I134 F12 I135 F12 I136 F12 I137 H10 I142 F10 I143 F10 I144 F10 I147 E8 I150 D9 I151 D9 I156 D7 I157 F5 I158 F6 I159 F7 I160 E7 I161 E8 I162 F8 I163 F8 I165 F9 I166 I5 I167 I4 I168 I4 I171 I7 I172 I6 I173 H5 I174 H4 I175 D13 I176 B13 I177 A5 I178 A11 I179 I6 I182 C3 I183 C3 I190 C3 I192 D3 I194 D3

Page 82

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Front Connector (FC)

EN 82DVDR730/0x 7.

CVBS

AL/MONO

JPJ1127

S-CONN

1921

YKF51

CINCH

1920

F1006

F1003

F1001

GND_FC

F1002

GND_FC

I201

3205

3206

3207

not used

75R

3208

GND_FC

3209

not used

GND_FC

6200

SIOV-CN0805M4CCG3

GND_FC

DF3A6.8FU

SIOV-CN0805M4CCG3

6202

DF3A6.8FU

6203

DF3A6.8FU

6.8V

6201

6204

6.8V

3200

DF3A6.8FU

3202

GND_FC

1K0

3201

GND_FC

3203

GND_FC

1M0

2203

GND_FC

47p

not used

1K0

2200

GND_FC

2201

GND_FC

330p

3204

68R

F1103

F1104

F1101

F1107

F1109

F1105

GND_FC

1922

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

S9B-PH

AFCRI_FC GND_FC AFCLI_FC CVBSFIN_FC

GND_FC NC

CFIN_FC

GND_FC

YFIN_FC

1920 B1 1921 E1 1922 C9 2200 A5 2201 C5 2202 E3 2203 C6 3200 A5 3201 A6 3202 B5 3203 C6

3204 C5 3205 C3 3206 D3 3207 E3 3208 A3 3209 C3 6200 A4 6201 B4 6202 C4 6203 D4 6204 E4 F1001 B2 F1002 B2 F1003 A2 F1006 A2 F1101 C8 F1103 C8 F1104 C8 F1105 C8 F1107 D8 F1109 D8 I201 E3

TO ANALOGBOARD

100n

2202

GND_FC

678

TR 13003_001

200803

Page 83

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Layouts Display Panel

EN 83DVDR730/0x 7.

Par t 1

TR 13005a_001

Par t 2

TR 13005b_001

TR 13005_001

200803

Page 84

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Layout Display Panel (Part 1 Bottom View)

EN 84DVDR730/0x 7.

TR 13005a_001

200803

Page 85

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Layout Display Panel (Part 2 Bottom View)

EN 85DVDR730/0x 7.

TR 13005b_001

200803

Page 86

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

EN 86DVDR730/0x 7.

Standby Panel (STBY)

1130 B3 1930 A2

Layout Standby Panel

3300 B3 F3003 A2 F3004 A2 I300 B3

1930

Tray_Led

GND

not used

from DC-BOARD

F3003

F3004

4K7

GND

3300

I300

1130

GND

POWER

EVQ11L05R

TR 13006_001

210803

TR 13004_001

200803

123

Page 87

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Analog Board: Frontend Video (FV)

0005 A1 0803 A13 1701 C7 1702 E7

1703 D7 1704 F14 1705 C1 1706 F14

2713 A3 2719 B5 2720 B4 2721 B5

2722 B8 2723 B8 2724 B10 2725 D3

2727 C8 2728 C11 2729 C12 2730 C9

2731 C9 2732 F1 2733 F1 2734 D4

2735 G1 2736 G2 2737 E15 2740 F8

2741 F4 2742 F8 3701 A7 3702 A2

3703 A3 3704 F1 3705 C14 3710 A9

3711 A4 3714 B11 3715 B12 3716 B5

3717 E12 3720 B9 3724 B8 3725 B12

3726 C5 3728 D13 3730 D5 3731 F13

3732 E15 3733 G4 3734 F15 3735 F14

3736 F15 3737 E6 3738 E6 3739 F10

3740 F9 3741 D14

3743 G8

3744 G8 3745 H5 3746 H6 3758 G6

4700 E4 4701 G5 5701 G1 5702 G1

EN 87DVDR730/0x 7.

5704 A2 5705 B4 5709 B11 5710 B6

5711 C10 5713 D13 5714 G14 6703 C5

6704 E5 6705 F5 7701 A10 7702 D15

7704 C6 7705 D6 7706 H6 7710 C8

7711 F14 7712 H4 7713 D123742 F6 7714 H6

7716 D14 7717 G7 9701 D4 F701 E2

F708 B11

F702 C11 F703 D7 F704 A4 F707 E3

I701 C2

F709 C6 I741 D4

I702 B6 I703 B5

F710 D3

I704 C5

F713 H5

I706 E6 I707 D7 I708 D7 I709 C8

I711 C9 I712 C9 I713 B9 I715 G1

I716 G1 I717 A9 I721 G9

I728 E9 I739 H6

I724 E14

I729 F5

I725 F13

I730 F5

I726 E10

I731 H4

I727 E8

I732 B3 I733 F1 I734 G1 I735 G1I723 F15

I742 D5 I743 E7

I744 E7 I745 A8 I746 B9 I748 C9

I749 D12 I751 D13 I754 D13

11 12 13 14

SB1

VFV I723

A: DC, 500mV/Div

5SW

18K

171819

5709

F702

REFERENCE

9110 1112 13

B/G

6u8

2122

VOLTAGE

3714

100n

FM-PLL DEMODULATO R

F708

2728

GND

10n

10us/Div

3715

10K

8K2

3725

10u

2729

GND

for MSTD only

BC857BW

I749

7713

3717

I751

4K7

1.9V

3731

270R

3728

100R

Pos.

I754

I725

PAL BG (/01)

1703 1704

1706 3731

L’

D/K

4700 4701

7710

12 13 14 15

0803

BARCODE

1.9V

7716

BC857BW

5713

15u

1704

1706

GND 5714

15u

I1O

5MHZ5 TPSR

TPS

3741

4K7

* VERSION TABLE

PAL I (/07)

G3956M

TPS 5,5 MHz

270R

0R 0R

TDA9817

K3953M

TPS 6,0 MHz

330R

TDA9817

5SW

7702

PDTC124EU

I724

1.9V

3735

GND

AFC-ADJUST

I748

2,7V

SIF1

57117KLY

GND

AFC

DETECTOR

VIDEO DEMODULATO R

AND AMPLIFIER

I726

3739

GND

2724

GND

5K6

PSS

SB1

SFS_TS

12 456789

5SW

0005

5SW

BRACKET

GND

5704

not used

3702

470R

I701

1705

UV1316-MK3

PRE-FIL

SCLSW

SDASW

RF IN

OUT

GND

33VSTBY

220R

3704

I715

I716

AGC

2732

GND

2u2

5701

Bead

5702

Bead

GAIN

100n

27p

CTRL

PRE-AMP

56p for ALEAD/AV3

TRACK FILTER

MIX-OSC

IF AMP

AGC

DET

PLL

SCL5SDA

VCC

33V

F701

GND

27p

2736

56p for ALEAD/AV3

GND

TRACK FILTER

NC110NC2

I733

2733

GND

I734

I735

2735

GND

OSCILLOGRAMS

..V MEASURED IN PLAYBACK MODE

..V MEASURED IN RECORD MODE

I717

3710

GND

3720

330R

I713

220n

2730

I712

2,5V

FPLL

INTERCARRIER MIXER

AM DEMODULATO R

680R

3.5V

5K6

GND

I746

2731

8p2

N750

2,7V

3,5V

VCO

TWD

QSS MIXER

7701

PDTC124EU

I707

I708

I744

3.1V

I745

AGC-ADJUST

3,3V

3,2V

7717 BC847BW

2723

7710 TDA9817

I727

5SW

2.5V

470p

I709

AMPLIFIER

SIF

AGC

2,8V

2740

GND

3743

56K

GND

22K

3724

2727

0,7V

TUNER

AGC AGC

VIF

AMPLIFIER

SIF

INTERCARRIER

MODE SWITCH

2u2

3744

GND

low leakage

2u2

2722

100n

I711

3,1V

0,9V

4567

VIF

5,2V

I728

3740

2742

GND

I721

100K

F704

150K

GND

2713

GND

F707

22u

I732

F710

2725

GND

2.4V

PDTC124EU

22p

7712

3711

2720

GND

9701

for PAL-I only

5SW

GND

3733

33K

100u

5SW

3716

6703

I742

F713

for MSTD only

4K7

I703

3726

I704

BA591

6704

BA591

6705

BA591

4701

delete for MSTD

100R

3730

GND

I729

I730

2721

120p

2719

220p

3745

5K6

4K7

I702

PDTC124EU

GND

PDTC124EU

GND

5SW

2K2

3737

7706 PDTC124EU

GND

I739

3746

GND

40,4-ADJUST

7KMY 5710

7704

7705

5SW

3738

3742

GND

5SW

10K

3758

5.1V

0.1V

5K6

6K8

4K7

6u8

5705

I741

2734

4700

delete for MSTD

2741

4K7

I731

3703

GND

IFOUT

ADC

F709

GND

3701

680R

GND

1703

GND

F703

3,3V

I743

1701

OFWK3953M

GND

OFWG3956M

I706

1702

OFWK9656M

GND GND

4.1V

7714 BC847BW

SB1

SFS_TS

1234

567

for MSTD only

PSS

AGC

8910

10K

3705

0.2V

GND

5SW

3732

7711

I723

BC857BW

2.5V

3734

3K3

3736

330R

GND

MULTISTD (/39)

G3956M

TPS 5,5 MHz

270R

TDA9818

AFC

SB1

47u

2737

GND

VFV

2K7

17015_001

190204

Page 88

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Analog Board: In/Out Video (IOV)

23456789

5NSTBY

12VSTBY

12VSTBY5VSTBY

5NSTBY

5VSTBY

4.7/4.5V

7401

4.5/5V

3405

GND

2407

GND

I461

I406

22K

GND

F4205

F401

not used

1945-1

3481

SDA

2459

SCL

I407

F402

3406

GND

not used

SDA

BC847BW

2450

100n

220K

SCL

SCLSW

8k2 for EPG 8k2 for EPG

BSH111

I429

2412

not used

from/to uP Board

VGNSTBY

SDA

SCL

5VSTBY

GND GND

12VSTBY IPOR_DC

VGNSTBY

TEMP_SENSE

WSFI

YFIN

GND

CFIN

N.C.

GND

CVBSFIN

AINFL

GND

AINFR

AINFL

VSA1

VSA2

ASC1S

FOME

SB1

AGC

PSS

SFS_TS

ION

12VSTBY

1945-3

I465

SCL SDA

INT

1942

PH-B

12VSTBY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3489

GND

ION

3429

100n

47K

F4210

PSS

BC857BW

3408

GND

F4207

GND

3437

AGC

5SW

5VSTBY

7403

5/0V

3K9

5VSTBY

12VSTBY

VGNSTBY

2421

10u

F4203

68p

2449

5VSTBY

10K

3438

WSFI

I419

SB1

WSFI

BC857BW

GND

not used

10K

FOME

5VSTBY

2402

GND

1943

FMN

4402

82K

F4209

I418

SFS_TS

from/to uP Board

123

5VSTBY

7402

5NSTBY

2428

3458

4K7

7419

F4505

INT

I411

0.8V

10u

3454

3407

5SW

3440

IPOR_DC

0.7/0V

0/0.7V

I409

3K3

3432

100R

2403

GND

2.5V

1.8V

GND

1.2V

I416

3483

GND

3460

4K7

delete for EPG

7420

10K

BSH111

TEMP_SENSE

PWONSW

I462

F499

10u

2464

GND

I408

3433

100R

I413

47u

2404

GND

7411 NJM2285M

IN1B

CTL1

OUT1

GND2

OUT2

OUT3

CTL3

IN3A8IN3B

2408

not used

SDASW

A_YCVBS

PWONSW

3447

47K

3446

47K

GND1

GND3

I415

100n

IN1A

IN2B

V+

CTL2

IN2A

5VSTBY

A_YCVBS

3400

100K

not used

-4.5V

5NESD

YCVBSIN2

F5120

2401

GND

5SW

5401

1.6V

3484

GND

I453

7404

BC857BW

3418

100K

GND

EN 88DVDR730/0x 7.

10 11 12 13 14

10u

2.5V

GND

1.5V

GND

2417

10u

not used

I428

100p

not used

I417

AKILL

3404

GND

3490

I412

1.7V

5VSTBY

3416

4K7

5NSTBY

3419

2406

GND

CVBSIN1

75R

150R

3459

3415

22K

10n

P50

3482

GND

10K

7421 BC847BW

GND

1945-2

IPFAIL

6409

GND

6401

5NESD

2410

5VSTBY

3455

not used

21A

GND

BZX384-C6V8

BZX384-C12

10K

F412

10K

3451

I424

I454

KILL

ASC1M

from/to uP Board

CVBSIN1

20A

F5119

3414

YCVBSOUT1

19A

6420

5NESD

6414

GND

75R

8SC2

18A

17A

F5110

BZX384-C12

F5116

BZX384-C6V8

3412

3445

150R

5VSTBY

3439

7412

PDTC124EU

GND

P50

SDASW

SCLSW

SDASW

FBOUT

I460

10K

SCLSW

16A

3409

75R

RCOUT

15A

6402

75R

2446

IASC1M

14A

I459

BZX384-C12

5NESD

3413

VFV

STBY

13A

F5113

6403

75R

3955

10K

I420

AFC

GOUT

P50

12A

11A

I458

6404

BZX384-C12

5VSTBY

75R

3410

I461

I462

I463

I464

I465

2419

I468

I469

I470

5VSTBY

1945-4

AFC

8SC1

10A

F5108

BZX384-C12

F5106

5403

10u

I414

2411

GND

3.5V

1.4V

I466

2.1V

2.4V

FBIN

STBY

from/to uP Board

2413

GND

100n

5VSTBY

5SW

BOUT

3471

100K

I457

47u

AIN1L

GND

F5103

I456

100n

2414

GND

VDD

R|PR|COUT-TV

G|YOUT-TV

B|PBOUT-TV

FBOUT-TV

Y|CVBSOUT-TV

CIN-TV

Y|CVBSIN-TV

Y|CVBSIN-TUN

CIN-TUN

C-GATE

DIGOUT1

DIGOUT2

DIGOUT3

DIGOUT4

DIGOUT5

DIGOUT6

SDA

SCL

GND

I405

GND

3466

2435

GND

VCC

VCCB-REC

GNDB-REC

GND

A_YCVBS

AIN1R

1940-1

AOUT1R

AIN1R

4401

YCVBSIN2

6423

BZX384-C12

GND

34673465

GND

VV V V

3472 100K

100K

F5102

GND

F5101

3468

GND

3475

100R

3476

100R

5VSTBY

5402

10u

47u

2405

GND

100n

2440

2.6V

2437

2439

100n

2.5V

2433

GND

47n

1.8V

2418

2423

2427

3494

150R

3452

150R

F4712

GND

101112131415161718

100n

2434

GND

VCCB130VCCB232VCCB3

R|PR|CIN-ENC

G|YIN-ENC

B|PBIN-ENC

CVBSIN-ENC

Y|CVBSOUT-REC

COUT-AUX

Y|CVBSOUT-AUX

R|PR|CIN-AUX

G|YIN-AUX

B|PBIN-AUX

Y|CVBSIN-AUX

GND1

GND226GNDB

GND

5VSTBY

5406

10u

47u

7408

STV6618

CIN-ENC

YIN-ENC

DECV

FBIN-AUX

GNDD

GND

45678

2409

GND

I483

I482

I481

2.5V

I479

I478

I476

1.6V

1.4V

2.5V

4.5V

2.1V

F4707

GND

AOUT1L

2438

F4714

GND

AIN1L

GND

YCVBSIN2

21B

20B

3411

75R

6419

5NESD

6424

BZX384-C12

5NESD

3427

2415

100p

not used

GND

F913

2441

2436

GND

F4716

GND

F4718

GND

F4720

F4722

F4721

1947

A_B

A_R

A_G

A_C

A_YCVBS

from / to Digital Board

D_CVBS

D_Y

D_R

D_C

D_B

D_G

CVBSOUT2

19B

F5210

F5219

BZX384-C12

75R

F5220

2416

2461

4u7

2460

4u7

ALDAC

DAC_MUTE

18B

6422

GND

2462

10u

2.3V

I447

34853486

GND

I446

GND

AKILL

3495

470R

FBIN

16B

17B

F5215

BZX384-C3V9

6415

F5216

75R

3417

GND

3491

GND

7410 NJM2267M

VIN1

not used

2.3V

VIN2

not used

I431

3448

270R

3443

100K

GND

3457

4567891011

I463

A_CVBS I405

D_CVBS F4712

D_Y F4714

D_C F4716

D_R F4718

D_G F4720

14B

13B

15B

F5213

F5211

75R

3401

3402

GND

6416

BZX384-C12

5NESD

3492

150R

3420

150R

6DB

I485

2445

GND

BC817-25W(COL)

7415

-4.3V

D_B F4722

GND

I341

AIN2R

1940-2

F5202

3463

GND

12B

11B

F5207

75R

3403

GND

6417

BZX384-C12

8SC2

10B

F5206

75R

6418

BZX384-C12

GND

AIN2L

3464

V VVV

3470

BZX384-C12

F5208

3422

820R

11.1/0V

3493

150R

3442

0/0.6V

150K

33K

47u

I434

3444

GND

GNDGND

3488

2420

100n

3435

75R

I438

I441

100K

3450

270R

WSRO

3487

GND

3426

GND

3434

I451

3436

6425

5NESD

3441

100K

6428

5NESD

2448

GND

4K7

68R

I440

I439

BZX384-C12

75R

BZX384-C15

470p

GND

5NESD

470p

5VSTBY

3431

3449

150R

5SW

I448

GND

5404

V+

5VSTBY

4K7

100n

2430

3425

470R

GND

2.2V

7406 BC857BW

GND

I449

1.6V

I484

10u

100n

2425

5405

Bead

GND

2.6V

2.5V

2.6V

2.5V

2424

GND

2443

I442

100u

I443

2442

22u

2432

I444

100u

I445

2429

22u

I433

VOUT1

VSAG1

VOUT2

VSAG2

GND

2463

10u

ARDAC

12 13 14

GND

F5201

3462 3461

GND

3469

GND

100K

100R

12VSTBY

7405

BC847BW

I402

I467

11.7/0.1V

7409 BC847BW

GND

3428

0/0.6V

100K

10n

2422

REAR OUT

GND

S-CONN

GND

6426

BZX384-C12

GND

I437

6427

2444

GND

BZX384-C12

GND

470p

5407

Bead

I486

BC817-25W(COL)

7416

3456

-4.3V

1940-3

3477

3478

3421

3423

3424

GND

1948

TCS79

Y C

1949-C

LPR6520

1949-B

LPR6520

1949-A

LPR6520

2447

470p

BZX384-C15

3496

470R

0350808190

GND

AIN2L

27K

11.7/0.2V

390R

33K

11.6/0V

7407 BC847BW

6429

AOUT2R

AIN2R

AOUT2L

F485

GND

CVBS

GND

AKILL

DAC_MUTE

5NESD

1940-1 A8 1940-2 A13 1940-3 A14 1942 E1 1943 C1 1945-1 I2 1947 I7 1948 F14 1949-A I14 1949-B H14 1949-C G14 2401 B4 2402 B1 2403 D3 2404 D3 2405 C8 2406 I4 2407 I2 2408 F3 2409 D8 2410 C4 2411 D6 2412 I2 2413 C6 2414 C7 2415 C10 2416 G11 2417 F4 2418 F9 2419 E6 2420 F13 2421 E1 2422 F13 2423 G8 2424 G13 2425 G12 2427 G9 2428 F2 2429 H13 2430 E12 2432 H13 2433 E8 2434 C8 2435 C7 2436 E10 2437 E9 2438 F9 2439 E8 2440 E8 2441 E10 2442 H13 2443 G13 2444 H13 2445 I11 2446 H6 2447 I14 2448 I13 2449 F1 2450 B2 2459 E2 2460 H11 2461 G11 2462 I11 2463 I13 2464 A3 3400 H3 3401 B11 3402 B11 3403 B12 3404 B4 3405 B2 3406 B2 3407 B2 3408 B1 3409 B5 3410 C6 3411 B10 3412 C5 3413 B6 3414 C5 3415 H4 3416 H4 3417 C11 3418 I3 3419 I4 3420 F11 3421 C14 3422 D13 3423 D14 3424 E14 3425 E12 3426 E13 3427 C10 3428 E13 3429 E1 3431 E12 3432 C3 3433 C3 3434 F13 3435 F13 3436 F13 3437 G1 3438 G1 3439 F5 3440 H3 3441 H13 3442 D13 3443 I11 3444 I13 3445 E5 3446 B3 3447 A3 3448 I11 3449 F12 3450 I13 3451 I4 3452 G9 3454 A3 3455 E4 3456 I14 3457 I11 3458 H2 3459 G4 3460 H3 3461 A14 3462 A13 3463 A13 3464 A12 3465 B7 3466 B7 3467 B8 3468 B8 3469 B13 3470 B12 3471 B7 3472 B8 3475 B9 3476 B9 3477 B14 3478 B14 3481 F2 3482 E4 3483 F3 3484 F3 3485 G11 3486 H11 3487 H13 3488 H13 3489 E1 3490 D4 3491 D11 3492 D11 3493 D12 3494 G8 3495 I11 3496 I14 3955 H6 4401 A8 4402 E1 5401 C4 5402 C9 5403 C6 5404 G12 5405 I12 5406 C8 5407 I14 6401 B4 6402 B6 6403 B6 6404 B6 6409 A4 6414 B5 6415 B11 6416 B11 6417 B12

6418 B12 6419 B10 6420 A5 6422 A11 6423 A8 6424 B10 6425 G13 6426 G13 6427 H13 6428 I13 6429 I14 7401 B2 7402 B3 7403 B1 7404 I4 7405 C14 7406 F12 7407 E14 7408 D8 7409 D14 7410 G11 7411 D3 7412 H5 7415 I12 7416 I14 7419 H2 7420 H3 7421 H4 F401 I2 F402 H2 F412 I5 F4203 F1 F4205 F2 F4207 F1 F4209 G1 F4210 E1 F4505 I2 F4707 I8 F4712 I9 F4714 I9 F4716 I10 F4718 I10 F4720 I10 F4721 I10 F4722 I10 F485 F14 F499 A3 F5101 B8 F5102 B7 F5103 B7 F5106 B6 F5108 A6 F5110 A5 F5113 A6 F5116 B5 F5119 B5 F5120 B4 F5201 A14 F5202 A13 F5206 A12 F5207 A12 F5208 C12 F5210 A11 F5211 A12 F5213 A12 F5215 A11 F5216 C11 F5219 A11 F5220 F11 F913 D10 I341 A13 I402 D14 I405 H7 I406 B2 I407 B2 I408 B3 I409 B3 I411 D2 I412 D4 I413 C3 I414 D6 I415 F3 I416 F3 I417 E4 I418 H1 I419 I1 I420 I6 I424 I5 I428 I4 I429 I2 I431 I11 I433 I13 I434 I13 I437 H13 I438 G13 I439 G13 I440 F13 I441 H13 I442 G12 I443 H12 I444 H12 I445 H12 I446 H11 I447 G11 I448 G12 I449 F13 I451 F13 I453 H4 I454 I4 I456 C7 I457 C7 I458 A6 I459 A6 I460 A5 I461 E6 I462 E6 I463 E6 I464 E6 I465 E6 I466 E6 I467 D14 I468 G6 I469 G6 I470 G6 I476 F8 I478 E8 I479 E8 I481 E8 I482 E8 I483 E8 I484 F12 I485 I11 I486 I14

A: DC, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

, 500mV/Div

A: DC

10us/Div

A: DC, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 500mV/Div 10us/Div

, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

A: DC

, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div 10us/Div

, 200mV/Div

A: DC 10us/Div

17016_001

190204

Page 89

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Analog Board: IN/Out Audio (IOA)

EN 89DVDR730/0x 7.

2504

3510

GND

AIN1L

3516

GND

123

100K

2524

I527

2505

3534

GND

AFEL

AIN1R

3514

GND

100K

2525

I528

AFER

5VSTBY

VSA1

VSA2

5VSTBY

2510

100u

100n

2503

GND

VDD

916

LOGIC

I505

GND

I506

LSBMSB

5VSTBY

7503

HEF4052BT

I503

I502

3507

100K

GND

I501

I504

3511

100K

GND

VEE

GND

VSS

2518

100n

5NSTBY

GND

F504

I511

I510

2516

I533

F501

3520

F502

GND

3530

820R

3528

-4.3V

4K7

7509

BC817-25W(COL)

AKILL

GND

3532

3533

I531

100u

220R

2520

AOUT2L

AKILL

I507

3K9

3535

not used

GND

I509

3K9

3536

not used

GND

3529

4K7

BC817-25W(COL)

5NSTBY

3508

3513

5VSTBY

GND

-4.3V

7511

2519

100u

2509

100n

2514

100n

5NSTBY

3531

820R

456

GND

AIN2R

2506

3504

2501

100K

AIN2L

3503

100K

AINFL

2507

AINFR

2502

100n

GND

2508

5VSTBY

VDD

7501

789

RSA1

RSA2

916

LSBMSB

LOGIC

HEF4052BT

7502-A MC33079

7502-B MC33079

GND

2535

GND

100n

3506

100K

5VSTBY

VDD

7504

GND

I521

3505

100K

ASC1S

LOGIC

IASC1M

from IOV

LSBMSB

from IOV

I515

I516

I513

I514

VEE

VSS

100n

2512

GND

5NSTBY

I517

I518

HEF4052BT

GND

I508

2511

I532

3521

100u

220R

2517

2513

AOUT2R

X5R

1u0

from DAC_ADC

ALDAC

GND

2515

ARDAC

GND

X5R

1u0

GND

from DAC_ADC

VEE

VSS

2536

100n

GND

I529

5NSTBY

3515

3523

3538

GND

3537

GND

I520I519

3K9

not used

I530

3K9

not used

3518

3526

7502-D MC33079

I534

7502-C MC33079

I539

4567

I502/I504

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

3502

3509

2522

100u

2526

100u

2531

2532

I525

100p

7505-B MC33078

I526

100p

I535

I540

I517/I518

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

not used

3501

5VSTBY

not used

3512

5NSTBY

-4.3V

I523

3517

4K7

7506

BC817-25W(COL)

-4.3V

I524

3519

4K7

7508

BC817-25W(COL)

3522

220R

3525

220R

MC33078

7505-A

2521

100n

2530

100n

GND

2523

GND

2527

GND

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

3524

GND

F501/F502

GND

820R

3527

820R

TR 17017_001

GND

ALADC

ARADC

AKILL

from IOV

AOUT1R

to IOV

AOUT1L

to IOV

230204

2501 A5 2502 A6 2503 A2 2504 A1 2505 A1 2506 A4 2507 A6 2508 A6 2509 B4 2510 A3 2511 E4 2512 D7 2513 F4 2514 C4 2515 F5 2516 E3 2517 F4 2518 E2 2519 A4 2520 F3 2521 C9 2522 E8 2523 E9 2524 F1 2525 F1 2526 F8 2527 F9 2530 C9 2531 B8 2532 C8 2535 D5 2536 F5 3501 B8 3502 B8 3503 A5 3504 A5 3505 C6 3506 B5 3507 C1 3508 C3 3509 C8 3510 D1 3511 D1 3512 D8 3513 D3 3514 E1 3515 D7 3516 E1 3517 D8 3518 E7 3519 E8 3520 F3 3521 F4 3522 E9 3523 E7 3524 E9 3525 F9 3526 F7 3527 F9 3528 F2 3529 F3 3530 F2 3531 F4 3532 C3 3533 D3 3534 C1 3535 C3 3536 D3 3537 F7 3538 E7 7501 A7 7502-A C4 7502-B D4 7502-C E7 7502-D D7 7503 B2 7504 D5 7505-A B9 7505-B C8 7506 D9 7508 E9 7509 F2 7511 F4 F501 E2 F502 F2 F504 D2 I501 C1 I502 C1

I503 B1 I504 D1 I505 B2 I506 B2 I507 C3 I508 E4 I509 D3 I510 D3 I511 C3 I513 C6 I514 C6 I515 B6 I516 B6 I517 B8 I518 C8 I519 D6 I520 D7 I521 D6

I523 D9 I524 E9 I525 B8 I526 C8 I527 F1 I528 F1 I529 E6 I530 E7 I531 E3 I532 E4 I533 E3 I534 E8 I535 E8 I539 F8 I540 F8

Page 90

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

EN 90DVDR730/0x 7.

Analog Board: Power Supply (PS)

1234567891011

GND

TO PCMCIA

TO BASIC ENGINE

F327 VDrain (Standby)

1300

F313

F381

F383

F384

F309

F314

GND

1301

T2.5A

3V3

GND

12V

GND

12V

GND

5VCR

for HDD only

F308

1931

9452A

1932

3V3

GND

12V

GND

TO DIGITAL BOARD

GND

PH-B

1934

12V

GND

EH-B

for Card Reader or HDD only

1935

GND

5VCR

B2B-PH-K

not used

1933

F350

F348

GND

5VCR

GND

3V3

F353

F360

12V

PH-B

F358

F352

F357

3V3

GND

5VCR

GND

12V

9302

123456789

F327 VDrain (no disc loaded)

2302

4304

F311

220n

2340

3305

12V

470p

F310

680K

delete for HDD

300V 8

DRAIN

TEA1507

7313

VCC

13,9V

GNDHOT

I306

1302

DSP

1936 4 3 2 1

for HDD only

PSI-SUB-E

I324

F328

3318

100R

GNDHOT

I330

I331

HVS

SENSE

DRIVER

CTRL3DEMAG

GND

F342

2337

GNDHOT

I348

4K7

3347

GNDHOT

I324 VDrain (Standby)

3306

220R

5302

HF2022R

1,9V

STP3NC60FP

2317

3351

1M0

10p

not used

2331

GNDHOT

I317

7307

3365

2342

100n

I314

3K3

2303

6301

1N4006GP

6305

1N4006GP

340V

I307

3324

560K

GNDHOT

BAT254

2324

GNDHOT

6321

100n

2309

2315

3321

GNDHOT

6302

1N4006GP

I316

I312

6306

1N4006GP

2307

3308

3309

330K

68u

47p

I325

3352

GNDHOT

820R

I340

BAV21

22u

3360

0R68

820R

6311

GNDHOT

3366

0R47

3356

6316

2325

I324 VGate (no disc loaded)

330K

1N4003

1K5

F306

3310

330K

I321

6309

1K8

3367

I343

7314

TCET1108G

2308

2314

BYT42M

2318

2n2

F307

5Vreg

I350

3300

3M3

47n

not used

5304

GNDHOT

3317

3330

470R

3301

I300

3M3

5300 SRW28EC9-E02V0133

I322

I335

F338

GNDHOT

I344

2329

100n

7315 TL431

F361

GNDreg

I325 VSource (Standby)

2301

2n2

I351

3333

GNDreg

I302

3331

10R

4K7

I355

GND

3334

GNDreg

56K

2316

F305

47n

4R7

3319

F315

F320

F304

F312

STPS5L40

GND

F323

STPS3L60-C2

F329

6315

I332

6312

I336

3346

3363

I339

6300

SB340

6303

SB340

6307

6308

6310

SBYV27-200

BAS316

BZX384-C6V8

2K2

BC847BW

5Vreg

3Vreg

6313

7310

3357

4K7

3332

5K6

3345

15K

not used

I325 VSource (no disc loaded)

3Vreg

2312

GND

I303

2333

I308

I310

GNDreg

F319

GND

F326

F366

5VSTBY

3364

3328

3358

2336

GND

C300

5306

2u2

F367

10K

I345

BC847BW

10R

I361

100n

12 13 14

1307

F300

F364

7317

3336

470R

3338

220R

7318

680R

100n

7302

3312

SI2306DS

I337

I349

6314

6320

GND

STD17NF03L

I305

STP16NF06FP

I315

123

STS9NF30L

I320

3368

1K5

47K

3325

I329

3350

10n

2326

GND

12VSTBY

3349

47R

3371

47R

3372

33R

3373

33R

BZX384-C8V2

BAS316

2310

2311

2330

3304

10K

I352

7303

2343

GND

2321

I327

3302

I347

7319 BC846B

8SW

TL431

3378

100n

I333

1K5

7309

F363

7301

GND

7304

GND

7305

GND

SI2312DS

3303

3307

I338

10K

F362

I357

3353

2K7

12VSTBY

47n

5Vreg

5308

22u

2305

GND

7311

F316

1303

T1A

MRT

GND

F318

2319

F339

GND

2304

GND

F359

2344

IPFAIL

F368

GND

2n2

not used

2306

I311

GND

1304

T4A

5309

22u

6.3V220u

for HDD only

5305

Bead

5VSTBY

3359

4K7

GND

12V

560u

F356

2313

GND

2320

GND

F369

2322

GND

F337

PDTC124EU

3337

F317

560u

330u

5307

22u

delete for HDD

3322

47R

not used

9304

F336

6319

BYD33D

7321

STBY

12V

3311

2335

GND

3335

470R

2341

GND

2328

GND

10u

I326

2323

GND

F334

F335

22u

3355

47R

I304

I313

2339

GND

100u

12VSTBY

I319

9301

not used

6325

1N5819

6317

BYD33D

3348

3362

2334

GND

I334

2327

GND

I323

3361

3326

47R

9305

not used

3354

2K7

3339

3340

GND

3342

3343

GND

3314

3315

GND

33VSTBY

3313

3323

GND

7312 BF422

6318

100n

GND

4K7

I301

4K7

I309

4K7

I318

8K2

100K

220K

BZX79-B33

F343

F340

2338

GND

3341

GND

3344

GND

3316

GND

F355

BZX384-C6V8

4301

not used

I356

100n

T1A

MRT

68K

47K

4K7

7306

PDTC124EU

GND

6322

6324

I342

GND

F301

3374

GND

F373

F374

F321

F324

F354

12V

F371

7322 BC857BW

BZX384-C27

I354

F302

3375

470R

1309

1308

500mA

PSC

12V

F372

125mA

PDTC124EU

STBY

470R

F347

F331

1306

MP13

7308

3376

F349

F322

GND

3377

470R

5301

F346

F333

F341

33VSTBY

33273329

I346

GND

470R

not used

F351

1u0

for Card Reader only

5VCR

3V3

F325

F382

F344

7320

SI2306DS

2332

1u0

2M2

5VSTBY

I353

5VSTBY

3V3

12VSTBY

ION

5NSTBY

33VSTBY

VGNSTBY

TR 17018_001

5SW

260204

1300 A2 1301 B2 1302 A3 1303 E9 1304 C9 1306 G13 1307 A12 1308 D13 1309 A13 1931 B1 1932 C1 1933 G1

1934 E1 1935 F1 1936 B3 2301 A7 2302 B2 2303 B4 2304 G9 2305 B8 2306 B9 2307 C5 2308 C6 2309 D4 2310 A11 2311 B11

2312 C8 2313 C9 2314 D6 2315 E4 2316 A8 2317 E4 2318 G6 2319 D9 2320 D9 2321 E11 2322 F9

2323 F10 2324 H4 2325 H5 2326 G11 2327 G12 2328 G10 2329 I6 2330 C11 2331 I4 2332 H14 2333 A8 2334 I10

2335 D10 2336 I8 2337 H3 2338 H12 2339 B10 2340 A3 2341 B10 2342 F4 2343 E11 2344 F9 3300 A6 3301 A6

3302 F11 3303 F11 3304 F11 3305 B3 3306 A4 3307 F11 3308 C5 3309 C5 3310 C5 3311 C10 3312 C10

3313 D12 3314 C12 3315 C12 3316 C12 3317 H6 3318 E3 3319 A7 3321 E4 3322 F10 3323 E12 3324 G4 3325 E11

3326 G12 3327 H13 3328 H8 3329 I13 3330 I6 3331 I7 3332 I7 3333 I7 3334 I7 3335 A10 3336 A10 3337 B10

3338 B10 3339 A12 3340 A12 3341 A12 3342 B12 3343 B12 3344 B12 3345 I7 3346 F8 3347 I3 3348 H10

3349 G11 3350 F11 3351 G4 3352 E5 3353 H11 3354 H12 3355 I10 3356 G5 3357 H7 3358 H8 3359 H9

3361 F12 3362 H10 3363 G8 3364 G8 3365 F4 3366 G5 3367 G5 3368 D11 3371 H11 3372 H11 3373 H11 3374 A13 3375 A13 3376 A13 3377 A13 3378 D11 4301 G12 4304 F2 5300 A6 5301 B13 5302 B4 5304 D6 5305 G9 5306 C8 5307 E10 5308 A9 5309 D9 6300 A8 6301 B4 6302 B5 6303 B8 6305 C4 6306 C5 6307 C8 6308 C8 6309 D5 6310 D8 6311 E5 6312 F8 6313 E8 6314 I10 6315 F8 6316 H5 6317 F10 6318 G12 6319 G9 6320 I10 6321 G4 6322 F12 6324 H12 6325 E10 7301 A11 7302 B10 7303 C11 7304 B11 7305 C11 7306 D12 7307 E4 7308 H13 7309 E11 7310 H8 7311 H8 7312 F12 7313 G3 7314 H5 7315 I6 7317 A11 7318 D10 7319 I11 7320 H14 7321 I10 7322 G12 9301 E10 9302 G2 9304 F10 9305 H12 C300 B8 F300 A12 F301 A13 F302 A13 F304 A8 F305 A7 F306 B6 F307 A6 F308 B1 F309 B2 F310 B3 F311 B2 F312 B7 F313 C1 F314 C2 F315 C7 F316 C9 F317 C9 F318 C9 F319 C8 F320 C7 F321 D12 F322 D13 F323 D7 F324 D13 F325 D13 F326 D8 F328 E3 F329 E8 F331 F13 F333 F13 F334 F10 F335 F10 F336 G9 F337 G9 F338 G6 F339 G9 F340 G12 F341 G13 F342 G3 F343 G12

F346 E13 F347 E13 F348 G2 F349 A13 F350 G1 F351 A14 F352 G2 F353 G1 F354 E12 F355 E12 F356 C9 F357 H2 F358 G2 F359 I9 F360 H1 F361 I6 F362 G11 F363 G11 F364 A12 F366 E8 F367 E8 F368 E9 F369 E9 F371 G13 F372 G13 F373 A12 F374 A13 F381 D1 F382 E14 F383 D1 F384 D1 I300 A6 I301 A12 I302 A7 I303 A8 I304 A10 I305 A11 I306 A3 I307 G4 I308 B8 I309 B12 I310 B8 I311 B9 I312 B5 I313 B10 I314 B4 I315 B11 I316 B5 I317 C4 I318 C12 I319 C10 I320 C11 I321 D6 I322 D6 I323 D12 I324 E3 I325 E5 I326 E10 I327 F11 I329 F11 I330 F3 I331 F4 I332 F8 I333 F11 I334 F12 I335 F6 I336 F8 I337 F10 I338 F11 I339 G8 I340 G5 I342 I12 I343 H6 I344 H6 I345 H8 I346 H13 I347 H11 I348 I3 I349 H10 I350 I6 I351 I7 I352 I11 I353 I14 I354 I13 I355 I7 I356 H12 I357 H11 I361 I8

F344 G14

3360 G5

10 11 12 13 14

A: DC, 100V/Div 5us/Div

A: DC, 100V/Div 2us/Div

A: DC, 1V/Div 5us/Div

A: DC, 2V/Div 2us/Div

A: DC, 50mV/Div 5us/Div

A: DC, 50mV/Div 2us/Div

Page 91

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Analog Board: Multi Sound Processing (MSP)

EN 91DVDR730/0x 7.

SCLSW

SDASW

SIF1

12345

1960

DVAR

GND

DVAL

from DV - Board

PH-B

GND

F6001

F6002

F6004

I607

3601

100R

8SW

2607

56p

GND

8SW

3603

100R

2609

2626

2u2

2627

2u2

56p

5SW

I630

I631

5SW

3606

3607

I615

I616

I608

I620

I621

1.5V

3.8V

7600

MSP3415G

I2C_CL

I2C_DA

I2S_CL

I2S_WS

I2S_DA_OUT

I2S_DA_IN1

I2S_DA_IN2

ANA_IN-

ANA_IN+

MONO_IN

SC1_IN_R

SC1_IN_L

SC2_IN_R

SC2_IN_L

VREF2

QFP44

DEMODULATOR

VREF1

AHVSS

GND

I602

IDENT

A/D

GND

ADR_CL

ASG

ADR_SEL

AVSS

GND

RSA1

I624

FM1 FM2 NICAM A NICAM B

IDENT

SCART-L

SCART-R

SCART

DVSS

5SW

RSA2

I625

D_CTR_IO0

D_CTR_IO1

S1...4

5601

10u

GND

4601

TESTEN

I2SL/R

LOUDSPEAKER R

LOUDSPEAKER L

DFP

HEADPHONE R

HEADPHONE L

Switching Facilities

23 24 28 32

5SW1

I612

10u

2605

GND

SCART-R

SCART-L

5602

10u

8SW

I601

10u

CAPL_M

STBYQ

DVSUP

RESETQ

DACM_R

DACM_L

AGNDC

SC1_OUT_R

SC1_OUT_L

1600

HC-49/U

18M432

3p3

2603

GND

100n

5.1V

3.8V

I611

2621

2602

I604

7.6V

5.9V

XTAL_IN6XTAL_OUT

2.3V 2.2V

I610

2620

GNDGND

2611

GND

3.8V

3p3

I613

2600

2623

10u

I603

2.6V

AVSUP

100n

GND

D/A

2601

VREFTOP

D/A

10n

AHVSUP

LOUDSPEAKER

I614

I605

I617

I609

I623

47u

5SW

3600

2616

GND

10K

2617

GND

2610

10n

2612

4u7

5SW1

GND

3612

100R

5600

2606

3611

100R

10u

100n

2618

GND

2604

GND

6600

4n7

10n

BAS316

2619

GND

2608

GND

4n7

4K7

3602

10u

AFER

AFEL

TR 17019_001

230204

1600 F7 1960 E1 2600 A6 2601 A6 2602 A7 2603 A7 2604 A9 2605 F5 2606 B8 2607 C2 2608 C9 2609 C2 2610 C8 2611 A7 2612 D8 2616 E8 2617 E8 2618 E9 2619 E9 2620 F7 2621 F7 2623 F6 2626 E2 2627 E2 3600 A8 3601 B2 3602 B9 3603 B2 3606 E2 3607 E2 3611 D9 3612 E8 4601 A5 5600 A8 5601 F5 5602 F6 6600 B9 7600 A3 F6001 E1 F6002 E1 F6004 E1 I601 A7 I602 A4 I603 A6 I604 A7 I605 B8 I607 C1 I608 C3 I609 D8 I610 F7 I611 F7 I612 F5 I613 F6 I614 B8 I615 B3 I616 B3 I617 B8 I620 E3 I621 E3 I623 E8 I624 A5 I625 A5 I630 E2 I631 E2

23456

789

Page 92

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

EN 92DVDR730/0x 7.

Analog Board: VPS

1990 D1 2932 B4 2933 B4

2935 C1 3936 E3 2936 C1

A_YCVBS

2934

100n

0.4V

2935

GND

100n

2936

22p

2937

22p

2.4V

2.7V

GND

SCLSW

SDASW

3934

100R

3935

100R

2937 D1 2938 B3 3931 B2

3932 C4 3933 C4 I998 E1 3934 D1

3935 E1

5931 A4

5932 A3 7931 B2 I987 B4

I988 B2 I989 C1 I990 C4

I992 C4 I993 C1

I994 C1I991 C1 I995 D1 I996 D1

I997 D12934 B1

I999 E3

1234

Data

CTRL

5932

VDDD

5SW

CTRL

Address

COR_

5931

I987

10u

VDDA

2932

GND

DV_

TEST1

TEST2

BLAN

I990

I992

2933

GND

47u

3932

47K

3933

47K

GND

100n

I989

I991

1.6V

1990

I993

I994

13M875

HC-49/U

I995

I996

I997

4.5V

I998

4.5V

I994

A: DC, 1 V/Div

20ns/Div

7931

STV5348

CVBS

CBLK

VCR_|TV

XTI

XTO

VSSO

SCL

SDA

GND

FFB

STTV

DATA EXTRACTION

MA_|SL

CLAMPING

SYNCHRONIZING

OSCILLATOR

FREQUENCY

SYNTHETIZER

TIME BASE

I2C BUS

INTERFACE

5SW

GND

POL

VSSD

GND GND

5SW

GND

3931

I988

L23

47K

VSSA

I989

A: DC, 200mV/Div

10us/Div

100n

2938

GND

Data

Clock

Data

RGBREF

I999

3936

DATA DECODING

DATA

PROCESSING

8 PAGES

MEMORY

Address

DISPLAY

INTERFACE

ODD_|EVEN

10K

Analog Board: Follow Me (FOME)

3950

I954

100K

3952

15K

BC847BW

7933

3941

10M

3954 C2 7932 B2 7933 B3 7934-A A2

2941

10u

I958

I959

33K

3944

2947

3945

2940 A2 7934-B B4 2941 B3 2942 D2 2943 D4

2944 D4 I951 B3 2945 D2 2946 E1 I954 C3 2947 E3

3937 C1 3938 C1 3939 C3

3942 E1 3943 E2 3944 E3

2940

100n

3948

I955

3942

2946

4K7

3951

22K

3953

4K7

I956

I957

33K

7934-C LM339D

3943

BC847BW

3954

2942

2n2

2945

180p

33K

3946

33K

5SW

3937

2K2

3938

2K2

3940

10M

3945 E33941 D3

3947 E4 3948 A23940 D1

3950 A3 3951 B2 3952 B3 3953 B2

FOME

GND

F950

7934-A LM339D

7932

4K7

GND

I951

I952

3939

4K7

5SW

7934-C C2 7934-D C3 F950 A2

GND

7934-D LM339D

2944

2n2

2943

180p

33K

3947

33K

5SW

I952 B3

I955 C1

GND

GNDGND

7934-B LM339D

GND

I956 D2 I957 D23946 E2 I958 D3 I959 D3

GND

TR 17021_001

VFV

CVBSIN1

TR 17021_001

230204

234

Page 93

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Analog Board: Digital In / Out (DIGIO)

1951 A4 2580 A3 2581 A1

2585 C3 2586 D3

3580 A3

3582 D2 3584 C1 7580-B C3 3585 C3

1234

from PS

5581

10u

2581

GND

5VDD

GND

100u

5580 A2 5581 A1 6580 C4

5580

6RG

7580-A C2

7580-C C3

2590

150p

I487

7580-D D3 7580-E C3 7580-F D3

3580

75R

100n

2580

GND

F4102 A42590 A3 F4103 A4 I487 A3

F4103

F4102

I488 C2 I489 C3 I490 C1

1951 YKC21-3416

GND

Ground not connected to the rear plane

EN 93DVDR730/0x 7.

I491 D2 I492 C3 I493 B43581 C22587 D2

DIGITAL

OUT

DAOUT

from DAC_ADC

3584

470R

I490

7580-A

PC74HCU04D

3581

2K2

5VDD

I491

3582

2587

I488

330R

7580-B

PC74HCU04D

7580-C

PC74HCU04D

7580-E

PC74HCU04D

7580-F

PC74HCU04D

7580-D

PC74HCU04D

Vcc

Vss

GND

I493

2585

I489

3585

560R

100n

I492

2586

GND

6580

GND

not used

BZX384-C6V8

GND

delete for IOE

TR 17022_001

230204

1234

Page 94

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Analog Board: Audio Converter (DAC_ADC)

EN 94DVDR730/0x 7.

12345678

5VSTBY

910

11 12 13 14

5VSTBY

5.1V

7010

PDTC124EU

4K7

3005

GND

25V10u

I004

I006

3045

4K7

3006

GND

I005

3021

5V GND

1K0

I007

1.6V

1.2V

5.1V

25V10u

AGND

2021

AGND

100n

7009

BC857BW

3051

GND

4.1V

100K

2049

GND

10n

5NSTBY

3052

22K

3V3DD

F009

3001

5K6

3009

5K6

3014

5K6

3018

5K6

DAC_MUTE

to IOV

3010

6K8 1%

3032

6K8 1%

5VSTBY 5NSTBY

Bead

5VSTBY

AGND

2007

AGND

2013

27p

6K8

3013

27p

not used not used

6K8

3036

from PS

5NSTBY

AGND

2009

AGND

2033

2017

100p

2010

27p

not used

2011

100n

7003-A MC33078

2012

100n

NP0 5%

AGND

F011

ALDAC

to IOA, IOV

AGND

100p

1.2V

NP0 5%NP0 5%

3017

33K

100p

1.2V

7003-B

MC33078

2041

NP0 5%

100p

2014

27p

not used

F010

ARDAC

to IOA, IOV

3040

33K

5N5V

47u

2000

GND

100u

2001

GND

TR 17023_001

230204

AGND

2006

1n0

AGND

2%NP0

NP0

20082025

1n0

NP0 2%

3004

33K

3008

27K

3016

27K

2023

AGND

2030

1n0

NP0

1n0

NP0 2%

AGND

1n0

2032

1n0

NP0 2%

3027

33K

3030

27K

3039

2045

AGND

1n0

1001

125mA

MP13

27K

NP0

2047

1n0

NP0 2%

AGND

3V3

4000

5001

not used

F006

F007

F008

3049

AGND

2R2

2038

AGND

100n

3.3V

100u

2043

AGND

4K7

2.3V

2.4V

I023

25V10u

2019

2020

AGNDAGND

4003

GND

47u

5002

Bead

2002

GND

6.3V100u

2003

GND

ATT./

MUTE

ATT./

MUTE

100n

DVDD

MULTIBIT SIGMA-

8X INTERP.

MULTIBIT SIGMA-

8X INTERP.

AVDD

DELTA MOD

7004 AD1852

NC6

2.1V

MCLK2

AUTO

4K7

CLOCK

192|48_7

DIVIDE

CIRC

96|48_10

CLATCH3

SER.

CCLK4

CONTR.

INTERF.

CDATA5

L|RCLK25

BCLK26

SER.

SDATA27

DATA

INTERF.

IDPM120

IDPM021

MUTE23

PD_|RST24

DEEMP9

10K

DGND

GND

3V3DD

DAC

AGND

BUFFER

BUFFERDAC

11 15

2004

100n

OUTP.

VOLT.

REF.

3V3DD

OUTL+ 17

OUTL- 16

ZEROL 22

OUTR+ 12

OUTR- 13

ZEROR 8

FILTR 14

FILTB 19

2035

GND

2036

47p

1.6V

not used

1.6V

I015

GND

I022

I014

GND

I032

I029

I031

7007 UDA1361TS

8 SYSCLK

14 FSEL

7 PWON

1 VINL

3 VINR

11 BCK

12 WS

SFOR6

CLOCK

CONTROL

ADC

I014/I032

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

100n

3.2V

VDDA

DECIMATION

DC-CANCEL

FILTER

DIGITAL

INTERFACE

VSSD

GND

FILTER

AGND

VDDD

VSSA

2R2

3034

3035

I013

3.2V

2037

100n

5VREFP

AGND

4VREFN

AGND

2VREF

1.6V

I018

2042

AGND

13DATAO

1.2V

ARDAC/ALDAC F010/F011

A: DC, 500mV/Div 500us/Div

2026

GND

10K

3031

6003

1N4148

GND

3020

10K

2018

3012

GND

47p

2028

2027

GND

3029

100R

1.2V

7006 BC847BW

2.7V

3015

470R

IPFAIL

from PS

DAOUT

to DIGIO

ION from IOV

GND

DAOUT

1900

F0021

GND

A_DAT

GND

FMN

F0001

GND

F0016

F0014

F0012

F0011

F0009

F0007

F0005

F0003

F0002

3026

3033

GND

D_IKILL

D_PCMCLK

D_DATA0

D_WCLK

D_BCLK

from / to Digital Board

A_PCMCLK

A_WCLK

A_BCLK

7008

PWONSW

from IOV

I036

3042

10K

I020

3.2V

BC857BW

6005

6004

3023

22R

3V3DD

3043

BAS316

5.1V

1N4148

47K

2015

GND

I001

3028

22R

1u0

7001 PDTA124EU

3054

22R

3022

22R

3024

22R

2022

GND

7005 BC847BW

3025

0.6V

100K

1u0

3011

100K

GND

3019

22R

47p

2051

GND

not used

1.6V

3044

47K

GND

I009

I008

2048

2050

ALADC

from IOA

ARADC

from IOA

I021

47u

I030

47u

4001

4002

3047

10K

3053

10K

1001 H10 1900 C2 2000 H13 2001 H13 2002 B7 2003 B7 2004 B7 2006 B10 2007 B12 2008 B11 2009 B12 2010 C13

2011 B13 2012 C13 2013 E12 2014 F13 2015 B3 2017 C13 2018 E5 2019 E8 2020 E8 2021 E8 2022 B3 2023 D10

2025 D11 2026 E4 2027 E4 2028 E4 2030 E10 2032 E11 2033 E12 2035 F7 2036 F5 2037 F7 2038 F8 2041 F13

2042 G8 2043 G8 2045 F10 2047 F11 2048 H2 2049 B9 2050 I2 2051 E3 3001 B10 3004 B11 3005 C5

3006 C5 3008 B11 3009 C10 3010 B12 3011 B3 3012 E4 3013 C12 3014 E10 3015 B2 3016 C11 3017 D13 3018 F10

3019 E3 3020 C5 3021 E5 3022 E3 3023 E3 3024 E3 3025 A3 3026 F3 3027 E11 3028 F3 3029 A3 3030 E11

3031 A4 3032 E12 3033 F3 3034 F7 3035 F8 3036 F12 3039 F11 3040 G13 3042 G2 3043 H3 3044 H3

3045 A5 3047 H3 3049 A8 3051 B9 3052 B9 3053 I3 3054 D3 4000 H11 4001 H2 4002 I2 4003 F8 5001 H12

5002 A7 6003 B4 6004 D2 6005 C2 7001 C3 7003-A B13 7003-B E13 7004 B6 7005 A4 7006 A3 7007 F6 7008 G2

7009 A9 7010 A5 F0001 F2 F0002 F2 F0003 F2 F0005 F2 F0007 E2 F0009 E2

F0011 E2 F0012 E2 F0014 D2 F0016 D2 F0021 C2 F006 H11 F007 H11 F008 H10 F009 H10 F010 E14 F011 B14 I001 D3 I004 D5 I005 D5 I006 D5 I007 D5 I008 I1 I009 H1 I013 F7 I014 G6 I015 F6 I018 G7 I020 G2 I021 H2 I022 G6 I023 D8 I029 G6 I030 I2 I031 G6 I032 G6 I036 G1

234

567891011

12 13

Page 95

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Layout Analog Board (Top View)

EN 95DVDR730/0x 7.

0005 A8 0803 C5 1001 C2 1300 A9 1301 A9 1302 A10 1303 B9 1304 C8 1306B8 1307 A8 1308 C8 1309 A8 1600 B4 1701 B7

1702 B7 1703 B7 1704 C6 1705 A8 1706 C6 1900 C1 1931 A10 1932 C8 1933 C3 1934 C4 1935 C3 1936 A10 1940 A6 1942 C5

1943 A1 1945 C2 1947 B5 1948 A5 1949 A4 1951 A2 1960 C5 1990 A1 2000 B3 2001 B3 2002 B1 2018 B1 2019B1 2020 C1

2038 B2 2043 B1 2048 B2 2050 B2 2301 C10 2302 A10 2303 A10 2304 B9 2305 B9 2306 B8 2307 A10 2308 B10 2309 A10 2312 C9

2313 C8 2314 B10 2315 C10 2318 C10 2319 B9 2320 B8 2322 B9 2323 A8 2325 C10 2326 A9 2328 A9 2332 A8 2335 C8 2340 A9

2344 B9 2403 C6 2405 B6 2413 B6 2417 B6 2421 B6 2424 A4 2428 C5 2429 A5 2432 A5 2434 B6 2442 A5 2443 B5 2460 B5

2461 B5 2462 A4 2463 A4 2464 A7 2510 A2 2511 A4 2516 A3 2519 B3 2522 A4 2526 A3 2581 A1 2600 B5 2602 B5 2605 B4

2608 B4 2611 B5 2612 B5 2626 B5 2627 B5 2713 B7 2720 A8 2722 C7 2729 B7 2732 A8 2737 C6 2740 B7 2933 A1 2941 B2

3019 C1 3042 A2 3047 B2 3053 B2 3300 A10 3301 B10 3305 A10 3306 A10 3308 C10 3309 C10 3310 C10 3313 A8 3318 C10 3321 B10

3322 A9 3326 A9 3342 B8 3352 B10 3356 C10 3360 C10 3412 A7 3422 A5 3432 B6 3433 B6 3434 A5 3435 A5 3436 A5 3441 A5

3447 A7 3451 A2 3454 A7 3502 B3 3509 B3 3515 A3 3517 A4 3519 A4 3523 A3 3532 A2 3533 A3 3601 B4 3603 B4 3701 B7

3703 B7 3724 A7 5300 B10 5301 C3 5302 A10 5304 B10 5305 A9 5306 C9 5307 B9 5308 B8 5309 B8 5401 C6 5402 A6 5403 B6

5404 B4 5406 B5 5580 A2 5581 A1 5600 B4 5601 B4 5602 C4 5705 A8 5709 A7 5710 B7 5711 B7 5713 C7 5714 C6 5931 A1

6003 C3 6004 C1 6300 B9 6301 A10 6302 A10 6303 B9 6305 A10 6306 A10 6307 C9 6308 C9 6309 B10 6310 B9 6311 B10 6313 B9

6316 C10 6317 A8 6318 A9 6319 A9 6325 A9 7301 A8 7302 B8 7304 B8 7305 C8 7307 B10 7312 A8 7313 C10 7314 C10 7315 C9

7317 A8 9001 B9 9002 C9 9003 C9 9004 C8 9005 B8 9006 B8 9008 A9 9009 A9 9010 A8 9011 A7 9012 A8 9013 B8 9014 B8

9015 C7 9016 C6 9017 A7 9018 A6 9019 A6 9020 A6 9021 A5 9022 B6 9023 C5 9024 B5 9026 A2 9027 B3 9029 C3 9030 A2

9031 A1 9032 A1 9034 C2 9035 C1 9037 B4 9038 B2 9039 A3 9040 C3 9301 A9 9302 C7 9304 A9 9305 A9 9401 C3 9421 A5

9422 A8 9423 C6 9424 A7 9425 B10 9426 A7 9427 A6 9428 A7 9429 A5 9430 A7 9431 B6 9432 C4 9433 A5 9434 A5 9435 C4

9436 B5 9437 B5 9438 B5 9439 B4 9440 B8 9441 A6 9442 A4 9443 B3 9444 B3 9445 C3 9446 C6 9447 A2 9448 A1 9449 C3

9450 A1 9451 C6 9452 A3 9453 A4 9454 C2 9455 A3 9456 C2 9457 A3 9458 B1 9459 B3 9460 B5 9461 B3 9462 C4 9463 B4

9464 C1 9465 B2 9466 B3 9467 A4 9468 A3 9469 A2 9470 A3 9471 B3 9472 B2 9473 B3 9474 A3 9475 B4 9476 A3 9477 B3

9478 B3 9479 B3 9480 A3 9481 A2 9482 A3 9483 A4 9484 A1 9485 B6 9486 A4 9487 C3 9488 A2 9489 C3 9490 A4 9491 A2

9492 A2 9493 B2 9494 A3 9495 A3 9496 A3 9497 A2 9498 C2 9499 B3 9551 A6 9701 B8

17024_001

230204

Page 96

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Layout Analog Board (Overview Bottom View)

2003 B10

2023 B10

2049 A9

2337 C1

2412 A9

2437 B6

2503 A9

2523 A6

2004 B10 2006 B10 2007 B10 2008 B10 2009 B10 2010 B10 2011 B10 2012 B10 2013 B10 2014 B10 2015 C9 2017 B10 2021 C10 2022 C9

2025 B10 2026 C10 2027 C10 2028 C10 2030 B10 2032 B10 2033 B10 2035 C9 2036 B9 2037 B9 2041 B10 2042 B10 2045 B10 2047 B10

2051 C10 2310 B3 2311 B3 2316 B2 2317 B1 2321 B2 2324 C1 2327 A3 2329 C2 2330 C3 2331 C1 2333 B2 2334 B8 2336 A2

2338 A2 2339 B3 2341 B3 2342 C1 2343 B3 2401 A4 2402 A4 2404 C6 2406 A9 2407 A9 2408 B5 2409 A5 2410 A6 2411 B5

2414 B5 2415 A4 2416 A5 2418 A5 2419 B5 2420 A6 2422 A5 2423 A6 2425 A7 2427 A6 2430 A5 2433 B5 2435 B6 2436 B6

2438 B6 2439 B6 2440 B6 2441 B6 2444 A6 2445 A7 2446 C5 2447 A7 2448 A7 2449 C6 2450 A4 2459 B6 2501 A5 2502 B8

2504 A6 2505 A6 2506 A6 2507 C6 2508 C6 2509 A8 2512 B8 2513 A7 2514 A8 2515 A8 2517 A6 2518 A8 2520 A6 2521 B9

2524 B8 2525 B7 2527 A6 2530 B9 2531 B9 2532 B9 2535 A8 2536 A7 2580 A9 2585 A9 2586 A9 2587 A10 2590 A9 2601 B6

2603 B6 2604 B7 2606 B7 2607 B7 2609 C7 2610 B6 2616 B6 2617 B6 2618 B6 2619 B7 2620 B7 2621 B7 2623 B7 2719 B4 2721 B4

2723 B4 2724 B5 2725 B3 2727 B4 2728 B4 2730 B4 2731 B4 2733 A3 2734 B3 2735 A3 2736 A3 2741 B4 2742 B4 2932 A1 2934 A1

2935 A10 2936 A10 2937 A10 2938 A10 2940 B9 2942 B9 2943 B9 2944 B9 2945 B9 2946 B9 2947 C8 3001 B10 3004 B10 3005 C10 3006 C10

3008 B10 3009 B10 3010 B10 3011 C9 3012 C9 3013 B10 3014 B10 3015 C10 3016 B10 3017 B10 3018 B10 3020 B10 3021 B10 3022 C10 3023 C10

3024 B9 3025 C9 3026 C10 3027 B10 3028 C10 3029 C9 3030 B10 3031 C8 3032 B10 3033 C10 3034 B9 3035 B9 3036 B10 3039 B10 3040 B10

3043 C9 3044 B9 3045 A9 3049 A9 3051 A9 3052 A8 3054 C10 3302 A2 3303 A2 3304 A3 3307 A3 3311 C3 3312 C3 3314 C3 3315 C3

3316 C3 3317 C2 3319 B2 3323 A3 3324 C10 3325 B2 3327 A3 3328 A2 3329 A3 3330 C2 3331 C2 3332 C2 3333 C2 3334 C2 3335 C3

3336 B3 3337 B3 3338 B3 3339 A3 3340 B3 3341 B3 3343 B3 3344 B3 3345 C2 3346 A2 3347 C1 3348 A8 3349 A8 3350 A3 3351 C1

3353 A2 3354 A2 3355 B8 3357 A2 3358 A2 3359 A3 3361 B3 3362 B8 3363 A2 3364 A3 3365 C1 3366 C1 3367 C1 3368 C3 3371 A8

3372 B8 3373 B7 3374 B3 3375 C4 3376 C3 3377 B8 3378 A3 3400 A9 3401 A5 3402 A5 3403 A5 3404 A4 3405 A4 3406 A4 3407 A4

EN 96DVDR730/0x 7.

3408 A4 3409 A4 3410 A4 3411 A4 3413 A4 3414 A4 3415 A9 3416 A9 3417 A5 3418 A9 3419 A8 3420 A5 3421 A6 3423 A6 3424 B6

3425 A5 3426 B6 3427 A4 3428 B6 3429 C6 3431 A5 3437 B5 3438 B5 3439 B5 3440 A9 3442 B6 3443 A7 3444 A7 3445 B5 3446 A4

3448 A7 3449 A5 3450 A7 3452 A5 3455 B5 3456 A7 3457 A7 3458 A9 3459B6 3460 A9 3461 A5 3462 A5 3463 A5 3464 A5 3465 A5

3466 A5 3467 A5 3468 A5 3469 A5 3470 A5 3471 A5 3472 A5 3475 A6 3476 A5 3477 A5 3478 A6 3481 B5 3482 C6 3483 B5 3484 B5

3485 A6 3486 A7 3487 A6 3488 A6 3489 C6 3490 A6 3491 A6 3492 A6 3493 A6 3494 B5 3495 A7 3496 A7 3501 B9 3503 A7 3504 A7

3505 C6 3506 C6 3507 A8 3508 A7 3510 B8 3511 A7 3512 B9 3513 A8 3514 A9 3516 A9 3518 A7 3520 A7 3521 A7 3522 A7 3524 A7

3525 A7 3526 A8 3527 A7 3528 A6 3529 A7 3530 A7 3531 A7 3534 A9 3535 A8 3536 A8 3537 A8 3538 A7 3580 A9 3581 A9 3582 A10

3584 A1 3585 A9 3600 B7 3602 B7 3606 C6 3607 B6 3611 B7 3612 B6 3702 A3 3704 A3 3705 C4 3710 B4 3711 A3 3714 B5 3715 B5

3716 B4 3717 C5 3720 C4 3725 B5 3726 B4 3728 C4 3730 B3 3731 C5 3732 C5 3733 B4 3734 C5 3735 C5 3736 C5 3737 B4 3738 B4

3739 B4 3740 C4 3741 C5 3742 B4 3743 C5 3744 C4 3745 A4 3746 B4 3758 C5 3931 A1 3932 A1 3933 A1 3934 A1 3935 A1

3936 A10

3937 B8 3938 B8 3939 B9 3940 B9 3941 B9 3942 B9 3943 B9 3944 B9 3945 B9 3946 B9 3947 B9 3948 C9 3950 C9 3951 C9 3952 C9

3953 C9 3954 B9 3955 A8 4000 C8 4001 B9 4002 B9 4003 A1 4301 A2 4304 C8 4401 A5 4402 A9 4411 B5 4412 B6 4413 B6 4414 B6

4415 A6 4416 C9 4417 B6 4418 B5 4419 A6 4420 C5 4421 B5 4422 A6 4423 A6 4424 A5 4425 A6 4426 A6 4428 A8 4429 A5 4430 A9

4431 A8 4433 B6 4434 B6 4435 A8 4437 B8 4442 B8 4443 A8 4444 A9 4446 A8 4447 A4 4448 A6 4449 A6 4452 A3 4453 A8 4454 B3

4455 B10 4459 B10 4460 B10 4461 B3 4601 B7 4700 B3 4701 B4 4999 C10 5001 C8 5002 B10 5405 A7 5407 A7 5701 A3 5702 A3 5704 A3

5932 A1 6005 C9 6312 A2 6314 B8 6315 B2 6320 B8 6321 C1 6322 B3 6324 A2 6401 A4 6402 A5 6403 A5 6404 A5 6409 A5 6414 A4

6415 A5 6416 A5 6417 A5 6418 A5 6419 A4 6420 A4 6422 A5 6423 A6 6424 A4 6425 A6 6426 A6 6427 A6 6428 A6 6429 A6 6580 A9

6600 B7 6703 B3 6704 B3 6705 B4 7001 C9 7003 B10 7004 B10 7005 C9 7006 C10 7007 B10 7008 B9 7009 A9 7010 C9 7303 C3 7306 A3

7308 A3 7309 B2 7310 A2 7311 A2 7318 C3 7319 B7 7320 A3 7321 B8 7322 A2 7401 A4 7402 A4 7403 A4 7404 A9 7405 A6 7406 A5

7407 B6 7408 B5 7409 B6 7410 A7 7411 B6 7412 A8 7415 A7 7416 A6 7419 A9 7420 A9 7421 A9 7501 B8 7502 A8 7503 A8 7504 A7

7505 B9 7506 A7 7508 A7 7509 A6 7511 A7 7580 A9 7600 B7 7701 B5 7702 B5 7704 B4 7705 B4 7706 C5 7710 B4 7711 C5 7712 C4

7713 C5 7714 B4 7716 C5 7717 C5 7931 A10 7932 B8 7933 B9 7934 B9

Part 1

TR 17025a_001

Part 2

TR 17025b_001

17025_001

230204

Page 97

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Layout Analog Board (Part 1 Bottom View)

EN 97DVDR730/0x 7.

TR 17025a_001

250204

Page 98

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Layout Analog Board (Part 2 Bottom View)

EN 98DVDR730/0x 7.

17025b_001

230204

Page 99

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

UP Sub Board: Central Controller (CECO)

EN 99DVDR730/0x 7.

10K

ALE

PWONSW

I825

2807

220n

FAN_OFF

to FACO

3889

GNDD

3878

1K0

1988

7804 B4 7805 B14 7806 A9 7807 E15 7808 H13 7810 G14 7811 H13 7813 H1 7814 H3

7815 H3 7816 A3 7817 F2 7818 H6 7821 C2 7822 B2 7825 H5 F8001 C1 F8002 C1

8910

3V3STBY

10K

3801

3855

470R

I809

GNDD

15p

2802

I802

1801

CX-11F

24M576

THG

F848

F840

CLOCK_ADJ

F841

EXT_DL

6805

BAT254

47p

2832

not used

to A4

LEVELSW

from F9

1K0

3826

F8804

F8803

45678

ASC1M

GNDD

15p

I803

10K

FLASH_TOSHIBA

F842

6804

GNDD

to A4

8SC2

P50

F8806

F8805

8SC2

GNDD

2801

I801

F852

to B2

18K

GNDD

F8802

123

KILL

N.C.

from / to IOV

0606 B15 1801 B8 1805 B9 1980 B1 1984 I11 1986 E1 1987 I9 1988 I8 2800 A9

2801 B8 2802 B8 2803 B6 2804 B6 2805 B6 2806 B11 2807 A8 2808 B13 2809 B14

2810 B3 2811 C3 2812 E14 2813 B8 2814 B9 3870 I4 2815 H1 2816 A5 2817 G9 2818 H2

5VSTBY

3863

4R7

TEMP_SENSE

to FACO

1980

A_YCVBS

PWONSW

TEMP_SENSE

IPOR_DC

from / to IOV

INT

GNDD

SDA

SCL

C36

0803

BARCODE

I818

F F

A: DC, 1 V/Div 20us/Div

BE_FAN

from FACO

1986

GNDD

FBIN

BE_FAN

N. C. D_RDY A_RDY

D_DATA

A_DATA

10FMN-SMT-A-TF

2815

220p

7813

BC847BW

3844

GNDD

IRESET_DIG

from/to Digital Board

SYNC F843

A: DC, 500mV/Div

10us/Div

33K

3832

33K

3843

GNDD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A_CVBS F8008

A: DC, 500mV/Div

6800

BAS316

220R

F8603

F8606

F8608

F8610

10us/Div

3864

4R7

F8008

F8007

F8006

F8005

F8004

F8003

F8002

F8001

5VSTBY

3839

F8604

470R

2819 A5 2820 A6 2821 A3

2823 I4

2825 I6 2826 I14 2827 I15

2828 H13 2829 H5 2830 H4 2831 H9 2832 G8 2833 G14 2834 H14

234

3865

3866

4R7

I816

3867

75R

2822

A_YCVBS

GNDD

to H3

3827

PWONSW

from E7

1K0

IPOR_DC

7822

from I12

BSH111

INT

to I12

GNDD

7821 BSH111

3816

10K

3V3STBY

SCL

to H13

SDA

from/to H15

47K

3882

GNDD

FBIN

from H11

to E13

F8607

F8609

3888

3.3V

7817

BC847BW

GNDD

I814

3V3STBY

P50

from/to H8

27K

I823

3842

220K

3841

GNDD

100K

3861

2M2

2818

GNDD

3881

4.7V

I813

100n

3804

10K

3812

47K

3802

1K0

3857

10K

220p

3801 A8 3802 E1 3803 E2 3804 B2

3807 D10 3808 D10 3809 E10

7816

BC847BW

3.5V

4.2V

6801

BZX384-C3V9

GNDD

3V3STBY

GNDD

22K

3806

2810

3811

100R

10p

22K

2811

GNDD

22K

3800

22K

100R for CHRYSALIS 3V3

3803

3856

10K

5VSTBY

47K

3849

I824

7814 BC847BW

GNDD

3810 E10 3811 C3 3812 C2 3813 G15 3814 H10 3815 G10 3816 C2 3817 F10 3818 F11

F847

3V3STBY

GNDD

10p

3805

100R

GNDD

100R for CHRYSALIS 3V3

3879

1K0

3V3STBY

10K

3868

KILL

to H8

3V3STBY

4K7

3840

I815

7815 BC847BW

GNDD

A_YCVBS

from B2

2821

3869

330R

3819 G15 3820 H5 3821 E14 3822 E15 3823 E14 3824 I7 3825 E8 3826 H8 3827 B2

10n

10K

3845

WSFI

4802

2823

from H10

1K0

not used

F843

SYNC

from I7

from H8

10K

3829

3874

F850

3875

F851

GNDD

3V3STBY

4801

5VSTBY

2824

1u0

1n0

3828 F13 3829 A4 3830 G12 3831 H112822 A2 3832 G1 3833 G112824 I4 3834 G9 3835 G9 3836 H10

3846

I821

I822

GNDD

123 7 8

456

3V3STBY

8SC2

from H8

33K

3837

12K

3850

18K

7804 TMP91CW12AF/LIRP1

AN0|P5092 AN1|P5193 AN2|P5294 AN3|ADTRG_|P5395 AN4|P5496 AN5|P5597 AN6|P5698 AN7|P5799 VREFH100 VREFL1 AVSS2 AVCC3

P60|SCK

83 84 P61|SO|SDA 85 P62|SI|SCL

P70|TA0IN4

5 P71|TA1OUT

P72|TA3OUT6

7 P73|TA4IN

P74|TA5OUT8

9 P75|TA7OUT

P80|TB0IN0|INT510

11 P81|TB0IN1|INT6

P82|TB0OUT012

13 P83|TB0OUT1

P84|TB1IN0|INT714 P85|TB1IN1|INT8

P86|TB1OUT016

17 P87|TB1OUT1

I807

I808

GNDD

I817

3870

100K

GNDD

3837 B4 3838 H5 3839 H1 3840 H3 3841 H2 3842 H2 3843 I1 3844 I12835 H15 3845 A43800 E2

3820

1K0

2830

3846 A4 3847 B7 3848 C9 3849 H2 3850 B43805 C3 3851 E93806 B3 3852 G12 3854 G5 3855 A8

3856 F3 3857 G2 3858 G9 3860 G10 3861 H2 3862 A6 3863 A1 3864 A1 3865 A2

3866 A2 3867 A2 3868 F3 3869 I3

3871 I6 3872 I6 3873 I7 3874 C4

BAT254

GNDD

I806

100n

6802

2829

GNDD

2819

GNDD

3854

1K0

3838

1K0

10u

100u

2816

GNDD

10-BIT 8-CH

A/D

CONVERTER

SIO/UART/IrDA

( SIO0 )

SIO/UART

( SIO1 )

SERIAL BUS

INTERFACE

( SBI )

8-BIT TIMER

( TMRA0 )

8-BIT TIMER

( TMRA1 )

8-BIT TIMER

( TMRA2 )

8-BIT TIMER

( TMRA3 )

8-BIT TIMER

( TMRA4 )

8-BIT TIMER

( TMRA5 )

8-BIT TIMER

( TMRA6 )

8-BIT TIMER

( TMRA7 )

16-BIT TIMER

( TMRB0 )

16-BIT TIMER

( TMRB1 )

7825

5.1V

LA7213

VIN

GND VCC

GNDD

220m

CSYNC

VSYNC

Bead

5804

F849

DVCC189DVCC2

CPU

WATCH

DOG TIMER

( WDT )

REAL-

CLOCK

TIMER ( RTC )

4KB RAM

128KB ROM

DVSS191DVSS2

GNDD

I818

4.5V

3862

10K

2804

100n

25 64

DVCC3

DVSS3

27 62

5VSTBY

3871

2803

100n

2805

100n

H-OSC

CLOCK GEAR

CLOCK DOUBLER

L-OSC

PORT 0

PORT 1

PORT 2

PORT 3

PORT 6

PORT A

CS/WAIT

CONTROLLER

( 4-BLOCK )

INTERRUPT

CONTROLLER

10K

3872

10K

GNDD

2820

GNDD

2825

3875 C4 3876 F12 3878 H8 3879 E2 3881 D2 3882 D2 3884 I14 3885 I15 3886 I15

F846

10n

7818

PDTA124EU

4.3V

100p

3887 I14 3888 F2 3889 G8 4801 F4 4802 C4 5801 B12 5802 B14 5803 A11 5804 A6

GNDD

P96|XT1 31 P97|XT2 32 RESET_

P00|AD0 44 P01|AD1 45 P02|AD2 46 P03|AD3 47 P04|AD4 48 P05|AD5 49 P06|AD6 50

P07|AD7 51 P10|AD8|A8 52 P11|AD9|A9

P12|AD10|A10 54 P13|AD11|A11 55 P14|AD12|A12 56 P15|AD13|A13 57 P16|AD14|A14 58 P17|AD15|A15 59

P20|A16|A0 60 P21|A17|A1 61 P22|A18|A2 65 P23|A19|A3 66 P24|A20|A4 67 P25|A21|A5 68 P26|A22|A6 69 P27|A23|A7 70

RD_|P30 71

WR_|P31 72

HWR_|P32 73

SCOUT|P64 87

CS1_|P41 80 CS2_|P42 81

WAIT_|P33 74

INT0|P63 86

INT2|PA1 36

INT4|PA3 38

3V3STBY

3.5V

0.3V

6800 H1 F804 B14 6801 A2 6802 A5 6803 G11 6804 G8 6805 F8 F809 C14 7801 B11 7802 A7 7803 B12

7802 PDTC124EU

3847

X1 28 X2 26

33EMU0

EMU1 34

30 AM0 24 AM1 29 ALE 43

RD_ WR_

I811

75BUSRQ_|P34

76BUSAK_|P35

77RW_|P36

I812

P37 78

LEVELSW

P65 88

90P66

BOOT

39PA4

40PA5

RY|BY_

PA6 41

42PA7

79CS0_|P40

CS0_

CS2_

82CS3_|P43

63NMI_

35INT1|PA0

37INT3|PA2

KILL

from G3

SYNC

to F3

1K0

3824

4K7

3873

GNDD

2813

1805

DT-38

32K768

3825

BAT254

from/to G2

F8807

P50

SDASW

7806 NCP301LSN30

to G13

IPOR

GNDD

10p

2814

I804

3858

SDASW

SCLSW

F8808

SCLSW

OUTP

GND

3851

10K

F8003 B1 F8004 B1 F8005 B1 F8006 B1 F8007 B1 F8008 B1 F801 E12 F802 D11 F803 D11

NC2

10p

100K

GNDD

C36

INP

NC1

not used

3848

10K

3V3STBY

LEVELSW

to H8

100n

2817

10n

2831

1987

F8701

F805 C14 F806 C14 F807 C14 F808 C14

F810 C14 F811 C14 F812 C14

3V3STBY

F813 C14 F814 C14 F815 C14 F816 C14 F817 C14 F818 C14 F819 D14 F820 B15 F821 B15

A(8:19)

2800

100n

GNDD

AD(0) AD(1) AD(2) AD(3) AD(4) AD(5) AD(6) AD(7)

A(8)

A(9) A(10) A(11) A(12) A(13) A(14)

A(16) A(15) A(16)

A(17) A(17) A(18)

A(18) A(19)

A(19)

3V3STBY

3817

2K2

3V3STBY

1K0

3834

1K0

2K2

3835

3860

3836

12VSTBY

F8704

SFS_TS

PSS

F8705

PCB-Test

F8706

AGC

WSRI/

F8702

F8703

1234567

ION

12VSTBY

from / to IOV

SB1

AD(0:7)

GNDD

AD(0) AD(1) AD(2) AD(3) AD(4) AD(5) AD(6) AD(7)

3807

100K

3809

100K

100R

F8707

I810

I805

WSFI

to A4

WSFI

3814

F8708

F822 C15 F823 C15 F824 C15 F825 C15 F826 C15 F827 C15 F828 C15 F829 C15 F830 C15

GNDD

ALE

3808

100K

3810

100K

3815

GNDD

10K

C36

FOME

2806

100n

1 11

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3V3STBY

18K

FBIN

to E2

F831 C15 F832 C15 F833 C15 F834 C15 F835 C15 F836 D15 F837 D15 F838 D15 F839 D15

3V3STBY

5803

EN C1

GND

GNDD

3V3STBY_R

3818

4K7

1984

to KUCO

STBY

F840 E8 F8401 H11 F8402 H11 F8403 H11 F8405 H11 F8406 H12 F8407 H12 F841 F8 F842 F8

Bead

7801

74LVC573

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

3V3STBY

1K0

3833

6803

BAT254

1K0

3831

F8403

F8402

F8401

1234567

AFC

FBIN

STBY

from / to IOV

11 12 13 14

F802

N.C.

A(0) A(1) A(2) A(3) A(4) A(5) A(6) A(7)

5VSTBY

F8405

5VSTBY

A(0:7)

WR_

F803

F8406

F843 F4 F844 D15 F845 D15 F846 A7 F847 A3 F848 E8 F849 B6 F850 C4 F851 C4

3V3STBY_R

CY62128VLL-70SC

A(0) A(1) A(2) A(3) A(4) A(5) A(6) A(7) A(8) A(9) A(10) A(11) A(12) A(13) A(14) A(15) A(16)

RD_

CS0_

F801

GNDD

F8407

GNDD

IPOR

12 11 10

9 8 7 6

5 27 26 23 25

4 28

3 31

24 29 22 30

3V3STBY

3852

C36

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

OE WE CE1 CE2

INT

7803

from B2

F852 E8 F8603 E1 F8604 E1 F8606 E1 F8607 E2 F8608 E1 F8609 E2 F8610 F1 F8701 H9

3V3STBY

VCC

RAM

128Kx8

128K-1

GNDD

3876

3830

10K

to B2

IPOR_DC

5801

10K

1K0

Bead

2808

100n

3V3STBY

GNDD

IPOR

from A9

F8702 H9 F8703 H9 F8704 H10 F8705 H10 F8706 I10 F8707 H10 F8708 H10 F8802 I8 F8803 I8

F8804 I8 F8805 I8 F8806 I8 F8807 I8 F8808 I9 I801 B8 I802 B8 I803 B8 I804 B9

I805 F10 I806 G5 I807 H4 I808 H4 I809 A8 I810 B10 I811 E7 I812 E7 I813 A2

I814 F2 I815 H3 I816 A2 I817 I4 I818 I6 I819 I14 I820 I14 I821 D4 I822 D4

13 14 15

A(0)

3V3STBY

Bead

5802

GNDD

AD(0)

AD(1)

AD(2)

AD(3)

AD(4)

AD(5)

AD(6)

AD(7)

from E2

10K

3828

for EU+EPG only

7808 M24C16-MN6

EEPROM

ADR

2 SDA

AD(0) AD(1) AD(2) AD(3) AD(4) AD(5) AD(6) AD(7)

SDA

SCL

GNDD

5VSTBY

(2Kx8)

VSS

GNDD

7811

PDTC124EU

2828

100n

SCL

GNDD

F804 F805 F806 F807 F808 F809 F810 F811

F812 F813 F814 F815 F816 F817 F818

F819

2812

GNDD

2809

100n

7805

M29W800DT-70N6

EPROM

1Mx8/512Kx16

15 A-1

13 14

10n

3823

100K

3821

10K

GNDD

8M-1

VSS127VSS2

PMBT2369 7807

GNDD

3V3STBY

VCC

GND

GNDD

I819

3884

100R

2833

100n

2834

GNDDGNDD

5VSTBY

3887

2826

7810 PCA9515DP

SDA03 SDA1 6

SCL02SCL17

EN5

GNDD

I820

GNDD

I823 H2 I824 H3 I825 G7

0606

SOFTWARE

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

RB RP

OE CE

BYTE

GNDD

10p

2835

4K7

3885

100R

100p

not used

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 48 17 16

15 12 11 28 26 47

GNDD

3V3STBY

SDASW

SCLSW

10p

not used

5VSTBY

GNDD

3822

2827

3886

F820 F821 F822 F823 F824 F825 F826 F827 F828 F829 F830 F831 F832 F833 F834 F835 F836 F837 F838

F845 F844

F839

10K

GNDD

4K7

100p

CS2_

3819

not used

A(1) A(2) A(3) A(4) A(5) A(6) A(7)

A(8)

A(9) A(10) A(11) A(12) A(13) A(14) A(15) A(16) A(17) A(18) A(19)

RY|BY_

RD_

10K

3813

3V3STBY

SCL

from D2

SDA

from/to D2

TR 18011_001

150304

10K

Page 100

Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

UP Sub Board: Fan Control (FACO)

1301 B4 1901 A4 2911 D1 2912 B3 2913 B3 3913 B2 3914 C4

3915 C3 3916 D1 3917 C1 3918 B2 3919 C1 3920 E1 3921 E4

3922 C1 3923 E1 3924 A2 3925 D1 3926 A2 3927 D2 3928 C3

3929 A4 3930 A4 3931 A4 3932 B4 3933 B4 3934 A4 4901 A1

1234

4902 D3 F904 B4 4903 D3 4904 B4 6901 E3 6902 A1 6903 C3 7902-1 C2

7902-2 D2 7902-3 C4 7902-4 D4 7903 A1 7904 A3 7905 A3 7906 A1

7907 A2 7908 B1 7909 B4 7910 B3 F901 A3 F902 A3 F903 B4

F905 A1 F906 A2 F907 A1 F908 B4 F909 C3 F910 E3

EN 100DVDR730/0x 7.

I903 C2 I904 C2 I905 C2 I906 E2 I907 E4 I908 D1

1 1901

MOT

GNDD

3934

3930

not used

3932

7909

to FAN

12VSTBY

22R

3914

3933 39293931

1K0

GNDD

1301

315mA

not used

4904

100u

7902-3

LM324D

EH-S

F904

F903

BC636

for SET FAN only

7902-4

GNDD

LM324D

F908

GNDD

6902

BAT254

not used

4901

PDTC124EU

7903

STBY

from CECO

GNDD

A A

FAN_OFF

from CECO

7906

PDTC124EU

12VSTBY

3919

33K

3916

3922

1K0

27K

TEMP_SENSE

from CECO

I908

1n0

2911

not used

GNDD

3V3STBY

F905

F907

7908

PDTC124EU

GNDD

12VSTBY

3917

3925

GNDD

12VSTBY

3920

3923

3924

36K

10K

5K6

I906

10K

I904

I903

10K

5VSTBY

3926

F906

GNDD

3927

33K

12VSTBY

GNDD

4K7

7907 PDTC124EU

3918

3913

GNDD

7902-1

LM324D

I905

7902-2

LM324D

7904 PDTA124EU

7905 PDTC124EU

GNDD

1K0

12VSTBY

100u

2912

7910 PDTC124EU

3928

18K

not used

4902

delete for SET FAN

GNDD

F909

6903

BAV70W

F910

6901

BAV70W

F901

F902

2913

1K0

3915

GNDD

4903

delete for SET FAN

GNDD

I907

470R

BE_FAN

to CECO

3921

TR 18012_001

150304

1234

Philips DVDR-730 Service Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

1. Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

1.1 PCB Locations

Display Board

1.2 Diversity Matrix

1.3 General:

1.4.1 System:

1.4.2 RF - Loop Through:

1.4.3 Radio Interference:

1.4.4 Receiver:

1.4.5 Video Performance:

1.4 RF Tuner

1.4.6 Audio Performance:

Audio Performance Analogue - HiFi:

Audio Performance NICAM:

1.4.7 Tuning

Automatic Search Tuning

Tuning Principle

1.5 Analogue Inputs

1.5.2 SCART 2 (Connected to AUX)

1.5.1 SCART 1 (Connected to TV)

1.5.3 Audio/Video Front Input Connectors

Audio

Video - Cinch

Video - YC (Hosiden)

1.6 Video Performance

1.6.1 SCART (RGB)

1.7 Audio Performance CD

1.7.1 Cinch Output Rear

1.7.2 Scart Audio

1.12 Dimensions and Weight

1.13 Laser Output Power & Wavelength

1.13.1 DVD

1.13.2 CD

1.8 Digital Output

1.8.1 Coaxial

1.9 Card Reader

1.10 Digital Video Input (IEEE 1394)

1.10.1 Applicable Standards

1.11 P50 System Control

2. Safety Information, General Notes

2.1 Description of the Production Number on the type plate

2.1.1 The Site Code (Production center)

2.1.2 BOM Code

2.1.3 Service Version Change Code

2.1.4 Production year/week code

2.1.5 Serial number

2.2.2 Laser Safety

Laser Device Unit

2.2 Safety Instructions

2.2.1 General Safety

2.3 Warnings

2.3.1 General

2.3.2 Laser

2.3.3 Notes

Dolby

Trusurround

Video Plus

Macrovision

3. Directions For Use

4. Mechanical Instructions

4.1 Dismantling and Assembly of the Set

4.1.1 Manually opening the tray

4.1.2 Front

4.1.3 Digital Board

4.1.4 Basic Engine

4.1.5 Analog Board

5. Diagnostic Software

5.1 End User/Dealer Script Interface

5.1.1 Description

5.1.2 Structure

5.1.3 Contents

5.2 Trade Mode

5.3 Virgin mode

5.4 Command Mode Interface

5.4.2 Error Handling

5.4.3 Command Mode Interface